Home

2008 DR Dodge Ram Diesel Owner Manual

Contents

1. Transfer Case exces heats oa ee la es 303 Bl Limited Slip Differential If Equipped 305 Bl Driving On Slippery Surfaces 306 Bl Driving Through Water 0 0 306 Flowing Rising Water ee ee se ee 307 Shallow Standing Water 307 N Driving Off Road iss soes EERS RE EES ues 308 M Parking Brake sie gees es er yn 309 M brake Syst ace on OEC ORO RR OLIO 311 Brake NOis sse aes 311 Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System 312 N Power Steering NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 267 H Tire Safety Information Tire Markings Tire Identification Number TIN Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Bl Tires General Information Tire Pressures 2 3 3 9 2x ERE EL Phe ire Tire Inflation Pressures Radial Ply Tires Compact Spare Tire If Equipped Limited Use Spare If Equipped Tire Spinning Tread Wear Indicators Life Of Tire Replacement Tires llle 330 Alignment And Balance 331 ll Supplemental Tire Pressure Information I Equipped ic sa sd e coss eon OD dotes e co Rus 332 B Tire Chains B Snow Tires enn Bl Tire Rotation Recommendations Dual Rear Wheels lll Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS If Equipped serende censum teins poe Bee 336 Base System If Equipped
2. HY wx gt lt EE a PUssAUpIG 1 2 3 4 5 RND AUX C Je lle lle lle lle 2 SET eo 815eb156 REF Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played For your convenience the volume can be turned down but not up when the audio system is off and the ignition is ON NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 Mode Button Radio Mode Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the CD player and Satellite Radio if equipped SEEK Button Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped mode Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new
3. 339 General Information 0 0 341 B Engine Runaway co ent RR dees 342 B Fuel EE RE EE aes 342 268 STARTING AND OPERATING M Fuel Requirements 6 7L Diesel Engines Bl Adding Fuel Diesel Engines Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap Bulk Fuel Storage li Vehicle Loading Certification Label Bi Trailer Towing Common Towing Definitions Trailer Hitch Classification Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings Trailer And Tongue Weight Towing Requirements Towing Tips Trailer Towing Mirrors If Equipped ll Snowplow Before Plowing Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability Over The Road Operation With Snowplow Attached Methods For Removing Snow Operating Tips General Maintenance ll Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc Recreational Towing 2 Wheel Drive Models Recreational Towing 4 Wheel Drive Models NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 269 STARTING PROCEDURES DIESEL ENGINES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts The starter should not be operated for more than 15 second intervals Waiting a few minutes between such intervals will protect the starter from overheating WARNING Be sure to turn off the engine and remove the key from the ignition switch if
4. Electrical Disturbances AM Reception FM Reception so 6 6 6 ccc cece eee 201 lll Sales Code REF AM FM CD Single Disc Radio With Optional Satellite Radio And Hands Free Phone Capability sss 202 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 202 Operation Instructions CD Mode 206 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode 208 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped sese RE dag RE 209 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped ss ey 6 eed RR RR emn 209 H Sales Code RAQ AM FM CD 6 Disc Radio With Optional Satellite Radio Hands Free Phone And Vehicle Entertainment Systems VES Capabilities s Pane ER se AE home EES 210 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 210 Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD Audio Play eis mie RS ER P mein 215 Load Eject Button CD Mode For CD Audio Play 8e ER N BEER EER ex 2G GER SR EE 217 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 219 Operation Instructions CD Mode For MP3 Audio Play 4 aeree 221 Load Eject Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 221 lll Sales Code RAK AM FM Cassette CD 6 Disc Radio With Optional Satellite Radio Hands Free Phone Vi
5. 00 238 og Add oelec unm EE eb ERA ve ig is Using The PTY Program Type Button Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped oo es ccc cece eee eee 238 If Equipped vie set ene RE retest tat ens 245 REC Setting The Clock esses 238 FT Button Cdi auc cd oe RE aO mad 245 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE PTY Button Sek iate b pads 245 W Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 249 Satellite Antenna cuius ER ER eb X XA sa 245 W Climate Controls sccesaasoek csaR hr RES 250 Reception Quality ee EE EE EE EE ee 246 Heater Only If Equipped 250 ll Remote Sound System Controls Air Conditioning And Heating It Equipped ccm Y RR 246 It Equipped iis GER sg ives E ER RE ER 252 Radio Operation EE EE EE EE EE ee 247 Air Conditioning With Dual Zone Tape Player eee 247 Tenpexiue Controle M Eomppeel spesies ae CD PAYG N N 247 Operating Tips s siis ieaie EEE EE A 260 H Cassette Tape And Player Maintenance 248 Sperling Dipa CIS qU up vq added do pace aes Bl Compact Disc Maintenance 249 NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 81c3c9a3 1 Headlight Switch 6 Passenger Airbag 11 TPMS Placard HI Max Load 16 Transfer Ca
6. LLL 30 E Windows MES RES eee 31 Power Windows If Equipped 31 Power Sliding Rear Window If Equipped Sliding Rear Window If Equipped Wind Buifeting ssec st reg d B Occupant Restraints 2424255 494 5056 Re ER Lap Shoulder Belts 00 0 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode It Equipped zie EE thew tae eS Center Lap Belts 2 6 EE EE EE EE Es Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System BeltAl rb sodas mises EC RES Ere Rd Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Seat Belt Extender 0000000008 Ned THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental Lock Your Vehicle llle 76 Restraint System SRS Airbags 47 m tir PRENNE Event Data Recorder EDR 59 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Child Restraint llle 61 Vehicle seer sine as feeble es P ERIS CE Bl New Engine Break In 00 0 74 Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The M Safety Tips o on noona 75 NESE AY OG m Transporting Passengers 005 75 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
7. 304 STARTING AND OPERATING M key must be in the ON position with the engine either RUNNING or OFF This shift cannot be completed if the key is in the accessory position NOTE The 4x4 system will not allow shifts between 2WD 4WD LOCK if the front and or rear wheels are spinning no traction In this situation the selected position indicator light will flash and the original posi tion indicator light will remain ON At this time reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift 2WD or 4WD LOCKS 4WD LOW NOTE When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may be heard This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h or completely stopped USE EITHER OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES Preferred Procedure 1 With engine RUNNING slow vehicle to 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL depress clutch on manual transmissions 3 While still rolling rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is ON not flashing shift transmission back into gear release clutch on manual transmissions Alternate Procedure 1 Bring the vehicle to complete stop 2 With the key ON and the engine either OFF or RUNNING shift the transmission into NEUTRAL de press clutch on manual transmissions ee STARTING AND OPERATING 30
8. Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Each vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH child restraint anchorage systems are installed in the 2500 3500 Stan dard Cab passenger seat position and the Quad Cab rear seat outboard positions LATCH equipped seating posi tions feature both lower anchor bars located at the back of the seat cushion and tether strap anchorages located behind the seatback refer to Child Restraint Tether Anchor later in this section Identification dots are located above the standard cab front seat lower anchorages as a guide for locating lower anchors 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE NOTE For children riding in the front seat of a Stan dard Cab model refer to the Passenger Airbag On Off Switch located in this section Standard Cab Passenger Seat Quad Cab Rear Outboard Seats NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Mega Cab Rear Seats Child restraint systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the seatback tether anchorage have been available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will provide add on tether strap kits for some of their older products Because the lower anch
9. SET DECEL 8147b086 NOTE The Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple speed control switch buttons i e SET and CANCEL are operated simulta neously in order to ensure proper operation The system can be reactivated by pushing the speed control switch ON OFF button and re establishing the desired vehicle SET speed 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEE To Activate Push the ON OFF button to the ON position An indi cator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the system is on To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press and release the SET button Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal normal braking clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle or pressing the CAN CEL button will deactivate speed control without erasing the memory Pushing the ON OFF button to the OFF position or turning off the ignition erases the memory WARNING Leaving the Speed Control ON when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system to cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the sys tem OFF when you aren t using it To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push and release the RESUME button Resume can be used at any speed above 30 mph 50 km h
10. 8 Release brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement 9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 with the transmission in Drive D 10 Shut OFF the engine and place the ignition key to the unlocked OFF position 11 Shift automatic transmission into P PARK 12 Apply the parking brake 13 Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar 14 Release the parking brake es STARTING AND OPERATING 371 CAUTION Damage to the automatic transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into P PARK with the transfer case in N NEUTRAL and the engine RUN NING With the transfer case in N NEUTRAL ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into P PARK Returning to Normal Operation Manual Shift Transfer Case Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 2 Apply the parking brake 3 Shut OFF the engine 4 Depress the brake pedal 5 Shift automatic transmission to N NEUTRAL or depress the clutch on manual transmissions 6 Shift transfer case lever to desired position 7 Shift automatic transmission into P Park WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case N NEUTRAL po sition disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain
11. Electronic Shift Transfer Case Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Bring vehicle to a complete stop 2 Shut OFF the engine 3 Turn the ignition key to the ON position but do not start the engine 4 Depress the brake pedal 5 Shift automatic transmission to Neutral N or depress clutch on manual transmission 6 Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object depress the recessed transfer case Neutral N button for 1 second 7 After the Neutral N indicator light turns off release the Neutral N button 8 After the Neutral N button has been released the transfer case will shift to the position identified by the selector switch 9 Shift automatic transmission into P Park NOTE The transfer case can not be shifted into Neutral N from the 4Auto if equipped position NOTE Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to depressing the Neutral N selection button NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 375 and must continue to be met until 1 second elapses and the shift has been completed If any of these requirements with the exception of 3 key ON are not met prior to depressing the Neutral N button or are no longer met during the 1 second time then all of the mode position indicator lights will flash continuously until all require ments are met or until the Neutral N button is released NOTE The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take p
12. Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO fol low the preceding safety tips Exhaust System Rubber Isolator and Loop Type Hanger If Equipped Inspect surfaces whenever the vehicle is hoisted for rubber to metal separation or deep cracks If however excessively deep localized cracks are present or any part ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429 of the exhaust system abnormally contacts the under body hardware the isolator and or hanger should be replaced Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood don t open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts a
13. CAUTION To maintain your vehicle safely follow these guidelines e Watch your vehicle s mileage and check your Mainte nance Schedules regularly for required servicing Ex cessive wear or damage to certain vehicle components can result if required services are not performed e If you have your vehicle undercoated inspect for undercoating material on the propeller shafts Such material could cause the shafts to become unbalanced and result in drivetrain vibrations Remove any under coating with solvent e If you have your vehicle undercoated make sure no undercoating material is sprayed on the exhaust sys tem or components of the seat belt system NOTE It is not possible for the manufacturer and Cummins Inc to anticipate every possible circumstance that can involve a potential hazard WARNING To maintain your vehicle safely and avoid personal injury follow these guidelines e Never spray or pour diesel fuel flammable liquid or starting fluids ether into the air cleaner assembly air intake piping or turbocharger inlet in an attempt to start the vehicle unintended engine acceleration may occur 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending agent They can be unstable under certain conditions and be hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel fuel If an engine has been operating and the coolant is hot allow the engine to cool before you slowly loosen the filler
14. Inserting The Compact Disc Single CD Player Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If the volume control is ON the unit will switch to CD mode and begin to play The display will show the track number and play time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track one NOTE e On some vehicles you may insert or eject a disc with the radio or ignition switch OFF e If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio OFF the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player e This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks SEEK Button CD Mode Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track on the CD Press the left side of the button to return to the beginning of the current track or return to the beginning of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection MUTE Button CD Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will display Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 SCAN Button CD Mode Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track To stop the scan function press the button a secon
15. en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 To Vary The Speed Setting When the speed control is on speed can be increased by pressing and holding the ACCEL button When the button is released a new set speed will be established Tapping the ACCEL button once will result in a 2 mph 3km h speed increase Each time the button is tapped speed increases so that tapping the button three times will increase speed by 6 mph 10 km h etc Tapping the DECEL button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed decrease Each time the button is tapped speed will decrease For example tapping the button 3 times will decrease the speed by 3 mph 5 km h etc To decrease speed while the speed control is on press and hold the DECEL button Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed NOTE When driving uphill at elevations above 2 000 ft 610 meters or when the vehicle is heavily loaded especially when towing the vehicle may slow below the SET speed If the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph 56 km h the speed control will automatically disengage If this happens you can push down on the accelerator pedal to maintain the desired speed Vehicles equipped with a 6 speed manual transmission should be operated in 4th or 5th gear under the above condi
16. sys tem Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for UConnect system operating instructions for this ra dio UConnect is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is trans mitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect system NOTE The UConnect system use requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 0 96 or higher See UConnect website for sup ported phones NOTE For UConnect customer support visit the m following web sites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e wwwjeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s micro phone for private conversation 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEE ed The UConnect phone book enables you to store up to 32 names and four numbers per name Each language has a separate 32 name phone book accessible only in that language This system is driven through your Blue tooth Hands Free profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth
17. LOAD EJECT Button CD Mode for MP3 Play LOAD EJECT Load Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays LOAD DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading LOAD 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M LOAD EJECT Eject Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push a button with the corresponding number where LOAD the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CD s in the radio the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout If the CD is removed and there are no other CD s in the radio the radio will remain in CD mode and display INSERT DISC for 2 minutes After 2 minutes the radio will go to the previous tuner mode MSG or INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Press and MSG or INFO button while playing MP3 disc The radio scrolls through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if avail able Press
18. Vehicle Identification Number THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS MA Word About Your Keys iese ese Ignition Key Removal Locking Doors With The Key E Sentry Key Replacement Keys 000000 ee Customer Key Programming General Information H Steering Wheel Lock If Equipped If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel ME Uueei3 AE OE OR S 18 To Release The Steering Wheel Lock 18 Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock SYSTE s isda seis avast toate s eodd ere ee 19 N Security Alarm System If Equipped 19 Rearming Of The System 19 To Set The Alarm uae ey Ee Ae ey wus 19 To Disarm The System 0 20 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEENEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE H Illuminated Entry System If Equipped 20 ll Remote Keyless Entry If Equipped 21 To Unlock The Doors EE EE ee EE Ee 21 To Lock The Doors ee ee ee ee ee ee 22 Using The Panic Alarm sesse Ese 24 General Information ee ee ee ee ee ee 24 Transmitter Battery Service 25 E Door Locks iab ER OE E ERA 26 Manual Door Locks If Equipped 26 Power Door Locks If Equipped 27 Child Protection Door Lock
19. When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger seating position Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until ET the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic lock ing mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE EE Center Lap Belts The center seating position for the Quad Cab front seat has a lap belt only To fasten the lap belt slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click To lengthen the lap belt tilt the latch plate and pull To remove slack pull the loose end of the webbing Wear the lap belt snug against the hips Sit back and erect in the seat then adjust the belt as tightly as is comfortable WARNING e A lap belt worn too loose or too high is dangerous e A belt worn too loose can allow you to slip down and under the belt in a collision e A belt that is too loose or to
20. ers Press the tune control again or wait 5 seconds to exit setting tone balance and fade RND SET Button Radio Mode To SET The Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Preset Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE Operation Instructions CD Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio
21. technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so UCon nect works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s UConnect system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages as equipped Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the microphone uy amp for the system depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped and either the radio or the mirror has the two control buttons Phone Button and Voice Recognition Button that will enable you to access the system Voice Recognition Button Actual button location may vary with radio e The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The UConnect system can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See UConnect website for supported phones If your cellu lar phone supports a different profile e g Headset en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 Profile you may not be able to use any UConnect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The UConnect system is fully integrated
22. wish to delete e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say e Note that only the phone book entry in the current Phonebook List Names language is deleted 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEE e The UConnect system will play the names of all the phone book entries e To call one of the names in the list press the Voice Recognition button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The UConnect system will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the UConnect system Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press Phone button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected An
23. F Long periods of idling may be harmful to your engine because combustion chamber temperatures can drop so low that the fuel may not burn completely Incomplete combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on piston rings and injector nozzles Also the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the engine NOTE An optional driver controlled high idle speed is available on automatic transmission equipped vehicles with speed control This feature allows the driver to select an elevated idle speed between 1100 and 1500 rpms Your dealer can enable this feature NOTE e If ambient temperatures are low and the coolant temperature is below 200 F 93 C the engine idle 280 STARTING AND OPERATING M speed will slowly increase to 1000 RPM after 2 minutes of idle if the following conditions are met foot is off brake pedal and throttle pedal e automatic transmission is in Park P vehicle speed is zero Applying the throttle will cancel fast idle e If the engine is equipped with an exhaust brake operating the exhaust brake at idle will greatly im prove warm up rate and will help keep the engine close to operating temperature during extended idle CAUTION Use of aftermarket exhaust brakes is not recom mended and could lead to engine damage Stopping The Engine Idle the engine a few minutes before routine shutdown After full load operation idle the engine 3 to 5 minutes befor
24. Fuel sk i 6er ORE 342 Diesel Fuel Requirements 342 Differential Limited Slip 305 Dipsticks is ors eene Ree ars 407 Power Steering ninie ninin ee eee 424 Disc Brakes sou 06 REDDER RE REK lt a 436 Disposal se aco REPE re aR aah DEE CR Ae 412 Engine Oll pines eae ER a ee ae 412 Used Coolant Antifreeze esses 432 Door Locks speres mede ERREUR PER RSs 26 Door Locks Automatic 0000 eee 149 Door Opener Garage 0 0 eee ee eee 154 Draining Fuel Water Separator Filter 415 Drive Belis iis estar ss gerne EER EP Re 412 Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water i sss ere sens pannia Ee 306 Dual Rear Wheels 0 000000 335 387 DVD Player Video Entertainment System 242 504 INDEX EE Electric Rear Window Defrost 87 174 Electrical Power Outlets lille 163 Electronic Range Select ERS 289 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 141 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 145 Electronically Shifted Transfer Case 298 Emergency Brake 6 0 ce eee 309 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 394 Hazard Warning Flasher iss 378 Jaeking ese espace eae yas eee ee ER Gon he 381 Jump Starting oces suos kk ata N ga am aa 391 Tow HOOKS si eb sy 8604564408 basen ds 395 TOWNE uanezackaqe cedens eR Re ee eg
25. REVERSE gear Never back down in NEUTRAL or diagonally across the hill When driving over sand mud and other soft terrain shift to low gear and drive steadily Apply the accelerator slowly to avoid spinning the wheels DO NOT REDUCE the tire pressures for this type of driving NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 309 NOTE After off road usage particularly in sand or mud inspect the underside of the vehicle for accumu lated dirt at the propeller shaft axles U joints brake rotors and calipers Use a hose to clean off any accumulation of dirt or mud Check the exhaust system and all exposed components for any sign of damage If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for im pacted material Impacted foreign material can cause a wheel imbalance Removing the foreign material from the wheels will correct the situation PARKING BRAKE The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To release the parking brake pull the parking brake release handle NOTE The instrument cluster red brake warning light will come on and flash to indicate that the parking brake is applied You must be sure that the parking brake is fully applied before leaving the vehicle 310 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING e Always fully op the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to
26. The airbags work modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the with your seat belt to restrain you properly In Customer Center Phone numbers are provided in the If some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all You Need Customer Assistance section later in this Always wear your seat belts even though you have owner s manual airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause seri ous injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel If the vehicle has window bags they also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Air Bag System Components e The airbag system consists of the following e Occupant Restraint Controller e e Side Remote Acceleration Sensors If Equipped e e Airbag Warning Light Driver Airbag Passenger Airbag e Window Bags above Side Windows If Equipped Steering Wheel and Column e Instrument Panel e Interconnecting Wiring e Knee Impact Bolsters e Front Acceleration Sensors 1500 Vehicles Only THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped Driver Seat Track Position Sensor If Equipped Passenger Side Frontal Airbag ON OFF Switch 2500 3500 Standard Cab Vehicles Only Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light 2500 3500 Sta
27. The first four digits of the twelve digit ESN SID number will display Press the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN SID digits display The SEEK DOWN will page down until the first four digits display The radio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed ESN SID Access with RAO and RAK Radios With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF press the CD Eject and TIME buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds All twelve ESN SID num bers will display The radio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed ESN SID Access with REC Navigation Radios Please refer to your Navigation User s Manual With the ignition in the ACCESSORY position and the radio off press the CD Eject and Set buttons simulta neously until the 12 digits of the ESN SID appear on the screen 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Selecting Satellite Mode in REF RAQ and RAK Radios Selecting Satellite Mode REF Radio Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Selecting Satellite Mode RAO and RAK Radio Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word SAT appears in t
28. The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the UCon nect system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 feet the vehicle Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing E e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System UConnect Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the Phone button and say UConnect Tutorial 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEE Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UCon nect system Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two proce dures From outside the UConnect mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the Voice Recognition button for 5 seconds until the session begins or e Press the Voice Recognition button and say Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect system For best results th
29. addition the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the indicator light will turn on again for 3 seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Keyless Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this pro cedure Repeat this procedure to program up to 8 keys If you do not have a programmed sentry key contact your dealer for details 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE NOTE If a programmed key is lost see your dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be repro grammed All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation STEERING WHEEL LOCK IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering wheel lock This lock prevents steering the vehicle with out the ignition key If the steering wheel is moved no more than 1 2 turn in either direction and the key is not in the ignition switch the steering
30. after a 3 hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low 326 STARTING AND OPERATING M Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving
31. child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Child Restraint Tether Anchor Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for con nection to tether anchors have been available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will provide add on tether strap kits for their older products Regular Cab models of Ram Pickups have two tether anchorages one each behind the front center and right seats Quad Cab models have three anchorages one behind each of the rear seats 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE WARNING 2 Lift the cover if so eguipped and attach the hook to the sguare opening in the sheet metal An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to 3 Install the child restraint and remove the slack in the seat failure and injury to the child In a collision the tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions seat could come loose and allow the child to crash E y H eae into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers or even be thrown from the vehicle Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Follow the instruc tions below See your dealer for help if necessary Tether Anchorage Points at the Right and Center Front Seat Regular Cab All Seats 1 Place the child res
32. dot and an ADD dot The fluid level must be kept within these two dots Do not add fluid above the full mark because leakage may occur at the cap NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437 WARNING Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake linings wear However an unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check should be conducted Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the correct Fluid type WARNING Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point or unidentified as to specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture CAUTION Do not allow a petroleum base fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Seal damage and loss of brake performance may result 438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Brake Hoses Inspection should be performed whenever the brake system is serviced or at intervals specified Inspect hy draulic brake hoses for surface cracking scuffing or worn spots If there is any evidence of cracking scuffing or worn spots the hose should be replaced immediately Eventual deterioration of the hose can take place with
33. for system service Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and driveability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required 19 Brake System Warning Light This light illuminates when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and remains on for a few seconds If the light stays on longer it may be an indication that the parking brake has not been released This light will illuminate if the brake fluid is low especially when braking or accelerating hard This light will illuminate if the ABS indicator light has a malfunction This light will flash if the engine is running and the parking brake is on NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 If the light remains on when the parking brake is released it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction In this case the light will remain on until the cause is corrected If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is necessary and continued operation of the vehicle in this condition is dangerous Acceleration which causes the rear wheels to slip for a period of time may result in the red brake light illumi nating and a brake switch code being set on ABS eguipped vehicles Depressing
34. message refer to Oil Change Required If Equipped under System Status EVIC Displays in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Section of this manual Perform Service Indicator Your vehicle will require emissions maintenance at a set interval To help remind you when this maintenance is due the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display Perform Service When the Perform Ser vice message is displayed on the EVIC it is necessary to have the emissions maintenance performed Emissions maintenance includes replacing the Closed Crankcase Ventilation CCV filter element cleaning of the EGR Cooler and cleaning of the EGR Valve The procedure for clearing and resetting the Perform Service indicator message is located in the appropriate Service Informa tion M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 480 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES IEEE Maintenance Schedule stowage gt x lt gt x lt gt x lt Miles 7 500 15 000 22 500 30 000 37 500 Kilometers 12 000 24 000 36 000 48 000 60 000 Months 6 12 18 24 30 Change engine oil and engine oil filter Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed X X X X X 7 500 miles 12 000 km or 6 months which ever comes first Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting 4X4 X X X X X Rotate tires X X X
35. move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back NEW ENGINE BREAK IN Your Cummins 24 Valve Turbo Diesel engine does not require a break in period due to its construction Normal operation is allowed provided the following recommen dations are followed NOTE Light duty operation such as light trailer towing or no load operation will extend the time before the engine is at full efficiency Reduced fuel economy and power may be seen at this time e Warm up the engine before placing it under load e Do not operate the engine at idle for prolonged periods e Use the appropriate transmission gear to prevent engine lugging e Observe vehicle oil pressure and temperature indica tors NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 e Check the coolant and oil levels frequently e Vary throttle position at highway speeds when carry ing or towing significant weight Because of the construction of the Cummins Diesel engine engine run in is enhanced by loaded operating conditions which allow the engine parts to achieve final finish and fit during the first 6 000 miles 10 000 km CAUTION e During the first 500 miles 805 km your new vehicle is driven do not tow a trailer Doing so may damage your vehicle e Limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h during the first 500 miles 805 km of towing SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passenger
36. s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical device is plugged into the AUX jack using a standard 3 5 mm stereo audio cable and the user presses and releases the MODE button until AUX appears on the display NOTE The radio will return to the last stored mode if the ignition switch is turned from the OFF LOCK posi tion to the ACC position the radio is turned on and the radio was previously in the AUX mode SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function MUTE Button Auxiliary Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will display Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function PSCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for 5 seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function RND SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Mode Button Auxiliary Mode Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the CD player and Satellite Radio if equipped Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Ref
37. tronic Vehicle Information Center NOTE There is also an engine hour function This indicates the total number of hours the engine has been running To display the engine hours perform the follow ing Place the ignition in RUN but do not start the engine With the odometer value displayed hold the trip button down for a period of 6 seconds The odometer will change to trip value first then it will display the engine hour value The engine hours will be displayed for a period of 30 seconds until the ignition is turned off or the engine is started 17 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped 40 This light shows when the front fog lights are ON 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE 18 Malfunction Indicator Light This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system n which monitors the emissions and engine control system If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on as a bulb check until the engine is started If the vehicle is not ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on for 15 seconds then blink for 5 seconds and remain on until the vehicle is started If the bulb does not come on during starting have the condi tion investigated promptly If this light comes on and remains on while driving it suggests a potential engine control problem and the need
38. you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Adjust the column only while the ve hicle is stopped Be sure it is locked before driving Tilt Steering Control Lever 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEE DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EGUIPPED Adjustment 1 Position the driver seat so that you are at least 10 inches 254 mm away from the airbag located in the center of the steering wheel 2 Fasten and adjust the seatbelts 3 Move the adjustable pedal switch located to the left of the steering column near the parking brake release in the direction you desire to move the pedals 4 The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in R Reverse or when the Speed Control is SET Adjustable Pedals Switch The power adjustable accelerator and brake pedals allow the driver to establish a comfortable position relative to the steering wheel and pedals NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 CAUTION Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged this device takes over accelerator opera tion at speeds greater than 35 mph 56 km h The controls are mounted on the steering wheel ON OFF RESUME CRUISE CANCEL
39. 4H can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion If the vehicle is in motion shifts can be made up to 55 mph 88 km h With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disen gage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after completing the shift Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever 2H or 4H amp 4L With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift an automatic transmission to N Neutral or depress the clutch on a manual transmission While the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired position Do not pause in transfer case N Neutral NOTE Pausing in transfer case N Neutral in vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may require shutting the engine OFF to avoid gear clash while completing the shift If difficulty occurs shift automatic transmission to N Neutral hold foot on brake and turn engine OFF Make shift to the desired mode 298 STARTING AND OPERATING INNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE NOTE Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle completely stopped however difficulty may oc cur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned Several attempts may be reguired for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur The pre ferred method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with t
40. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck size led up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE Infants and Small Children There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Use the restraint that is correct for your child Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front sea
41. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents STARTING AND OPERATING 355 Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch TOW HEIGHT 81546c40 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer 356 STARTING AND OPERATING Sx e The weight of any other type of cargo or eguipment CAUTION put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may damage NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac ard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual your vehicle e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h WARNING Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom mended Your vehicle may require special axle lubricant Please refer to the fluids section of this manual Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this manual When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings N
42. Key will disable the alarm Rearming of the System The security system will rearm itself after the 15 addi tional minutes of headlights and security telltale flashing if the system has not been disabled If the condition which initiated the alarm is still present the system will ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition To Set the Alarm The alarm will set when you use the power door locks or use the Keyless Entry transmitter to lock the doors After all the doors are locked and closed the SECURITY light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the system is arming The security light in the instrument panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set After the alarm is set the security light will flash at a slower rate to indicate that the system is armed 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE NOTE If the SECURITY light stays on continuously during vehicle operation have the system checked by your dealer To Disarm the System Use the Keyless Entry transmitter to unlock the door If something has triggered the system in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors and the security lamp will flash for 30 seconds Check the vehicle for tampering The Security system will also disarm if the vehicle is started with a programmed Sentry Key If an unpro grammed Sent
43. Outside air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct the airflow Bi Level Zs Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel and those located on the floor NOTE There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Heat 2 Outside air flows primarily through the floor out lets located under the instrument panel 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE Mix tipe Outside air flows in equal proportions through the ef floor and defroster outlets Defrost Sv Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield through the defroster outlets located at the base of the windshield and side window demist outlets NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the A C button has not been pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield Blower Control co 8 o NEN 816463cd The rotary knob on the left of the control panel is the blower control Turn the knob clockwise to one of the four positions to obtain the blower speed you desire To turn the blower off turn the knob to the far left posi tion NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 Dual Zone Temperature Control 8164
44. Perform Service When the Perform Ser vice message is displayed on the EVIC it is necessary to have the emissions maintenance performed Emissions maintenance includes replacing the Closed Crankcase Ventilation CCV filter element cleaning of the EGR Cooler and cleaning of the EGR Valve The procedure for clearing and resetting the Perform Service indicator message is located in the appropriate Service Informa tion Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK If the trans mission is not in PARK the EVIC will display NOT AVAILABLE and VEHICLE NOT IN PARK Press and release the menu button until the Personal Settings displays on the EVIC Use the STEP button to display one of the following e LANGUAGE When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions Press the RESET button while in this display to select English Espanol or Francais Then as you continue the information will display in the selected language UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 e AUTO DOOR LOCKS gt YES When ON is selected all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears AUTO UNLOCK ON EXIT gt YES Wh
45. Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five 5 seconds prior to using the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Voice Tree Main Menu Towing E English Phonebook e mergency Espanol oneboo Francais Last Enter Number Number on Phone is redialed See Phonebook Flowchart See Setup Flowchart The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf7b 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Y at a time Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Enter Location Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 Enter Number Entry Deleted Phonebook Cleared New Entry Added Voice Tree Setup Confirmation Prompts UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Setup Confirmation will English Espanol Prompts temporarily or Francais on off Say 4 digit pin code Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing System Lists override oe Solos phone List Ph
46. SRW models On 3500 dual rear wheel models 4 By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise raise the DRW the lug nuts are a two piece assembly with a flat vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface face Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not fully tighten the nuts until the vehicle has been lowered 6 Using the wheel wrench finish tightening the nuts using a crisscross pattern Correct nut tightness is 135 ft Ibs 183 N m torque for 2500 3500 single rear wheel 386 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME SRW models and 145 ft lbs 197 N m for 3500 dual rear wheel models If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle Al ways stow the jack parts and the extra tire and wheel in the places provided 7 Install wheel center cap and remove wheel blocks Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center caps on the spare wheel This may result in cap damage 8 Lower the jack to its fully closed position If the jack will not lower by turning the dial thumb wheel by hand it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in order to lower the jack Stow the replaced tire jack and tools as previously described 9 Adjust the tire pressure when possible NOTE Do not oil wheel studs For chrome wheels
47. STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 Power Sliding Rear Window If Equipped Power Sliding Rear Window Switch The power sliding rear window switch is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls Press the right side of the switch to open the glass and the left side of the switch to close the glass Sliding Rear Window If Equipped A locking device in the center of the window helps to prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle Squeeze the lock to release the window Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or partially open positions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNENEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers front airbags for both the driver and front passenger and if so eguipped window bags for the driver and passengers seated next to a window If you will be carrying children too small for adult size belts your seat belts also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems Please pay close attention to th
48. System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time put transmission in neutral and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily refer to Cooling System Operating information in the Maintenance section of this manual for more informa tion 364 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer Towing Mirrors If Eduipped These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror head to provide a greater vision range when towing extra wide loads To change position inboard or out board the mirror head should be rotated flipped Out or In A small blindspot mirror is integrated onto the main mirror surface NOTE Fold the 7 x 10 inch trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to entering an automated car wash Blindspot Mirror Trailer Towing Position SNOWPLOW Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory installed option These packages include components necessary to eguip your vehicle with a snowplow NOTE Before installation of a snowplow it is highly recommended that the owner installer obtain and STARTING AND OPERATING 365 follow the recommendations contained within the cur rent Dodge BODY BUILDER S GUIDE See your dealer installer or snowplow manufacture for this information There are unigue electrical systems that must be con nected to
49. X X Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct X X X X X stowage ooo Eo Lubricate outer tie rod ends gt x lt Check transfer case fluid level 4X4 Xx NEE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 481 Miles 7 500 15 000 22 500 30 000 37 500 Kilometers 12 000 24 000 36 000 48 000 60 000 Months 6 12 18 24 30 Change front and rear axle fluid 4X4 X X Replace fuel filter element X X Inspect brake linings X Inspect and adjust parking brake if necessary X Inspect fan hub X Inspect damper X Inspect front wheel bearings X Inspect drive belt replace as necessary X M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 482 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES EE Miles Kilometers Months 45 000 72 000 36 52 500 84 000 42 60 000 97 000 48 67 500 109 000 54 75 000 121 000 60 Change engine oil and engine oil filter Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting 4X4 Rotate tires Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage Lubricate outer tie rod ends Drain and refill transfer case fluid 4X4 x PD x PD x PD x PD Change front and rear axle fluid 4X4 gt x lt KJI x ppm gt x lt Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid change main sump filter and s
50. a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL button once to select TOW HAUL In TOW HAUL mode 4th to 5th gear upshifts are delayed Shifts into 5th and 6th gear are still allowed under steady cruise conditions Closed throttle down shifts for improved engine braking may occur during steady braking maneuvers Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation Normal operation is always the default at engine start up The TOW HAUL light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been activated If the TOW HAUL modes are desired the button must be pressed each time the engine is started Electronic Range Select ERS Operation The Auto 6 Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows you to move the switch down or up when the shifter is in the D Drive position allowing the selection of the desired top gear For example if the driver shifts the transmission into 3rd gear the transmis sion will never shift above 3rd gear but can shift down to 2nd or 1st gear when needed 290 STARTING AND OPERATING M Switching from ERS to D Mode can be done at any vehicle speed To switch from Drive mode to ERS mode press the switch down once The current gear will be maintained as the top gear To disable ERS simply press and hold the switch up until D is displayed in the instrument cluster odometer WAR
51. a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing phone book entries is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Delete All Entries in the UConnect Phonebook FRON UO Beek e Press the Phone button to begin e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish RE Da Oper e a to delete You can either say the name of a phone book PISIEEDOS EPRA 3 entry that you wish to delete or you can say List e The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you Names to hear a list of the entries in the phone book wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the Voice Recognition button while the UConnect system is playing the desired entry and say Delete After confirmation the phone book entries will be deleted Note that only the phone book in the current language e After you enter the name the UConnect system will deleted ask you which designation you wish to delete home List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook work mobile pager or all Say the designation you e Press the Phone button to begin
52. a tire the sensors may result failure or condition e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent mois ture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure en STARTING AND OPERATING 339 Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPM system will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS consists of the following
53. airbag inflation deployment a greater risk for the passenger than the risk of hitting the dashboard instrument panel or windshield in a crash 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNENEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE To Turn On the Passenger Airbag 2500 3500 Standard Cab Vehicles Only Place the ignition key in the Passenger Airbag On Off Switch push the key in and turn counterclockwise and remove the key from the switch This will turn on the passenger airbag The Off light near the switch will be off when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position If A Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy the airbags when the impact sensors detect a moderate to severe frontal collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then immediately deflate NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you ha
54. an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an ap pointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized Chrysler Dodge or Jeep dealer We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer They know you and your vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s dealers have the facilities factory trained E F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 491 technicians special tools and the latest information to assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to your dealer s service manager first Most matters can be resolved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the dealership They want to know if you need assistance e If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may con
55. and black buckle ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted If the webbing is twisted follow the preceding procedure to detach the black latch and black buckle untwist the webbing and reattach Inserting Latch Plate the black latch and black buckle 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNENEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front row outboard seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt away from your neck Press the button located on the upper belt guide and then move it up or down to the position that serves you best 2 80d813fb In Use Position WARNING If the black latch and buckle are not connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant the seat belt will not restrain you properly Shoulder Belt Adjustment NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you ll prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The automatic locking mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt
56. and minutes depending on your radio model whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position When the ignition switch is in the OFF position or when the radio frequency is being displayed time keep ing is accurately maintained 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M On the RAO radio the time button alternates the location of the time and freguency on the display On the REF only one of the two time or freguency is displayed at a time Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the time button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Audio control 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side Tune Audio control to set the minutes 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Audio control 5 To exit press any button knob or wait approximately 5 seconds RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast Signals Your new radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions Like any system however car radios have performance limitations due to mobile op eration and natural phenomena which might lead you to believe your sound system is malfunctioning To help you understand and save you concern about these ap parent malfunctions you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio sig nals Two Types of Signals There are two basic types of radio signals AM or Amplitude Modulation
57. and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle 372 STARTING AND OPERATING Sx CAUTION e Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged e Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid will leak from the transfer case and damage the internal parts Recreational Towing Procedure Electronic Shift Transfer Case If Equipped Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing CAUTION It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in Neutral N before recre ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts 1 Bring vehicle to a complete stop 2 Shut OFF the engine 3 Turn the ignition key to the ON position but do not start the engine 4 Depress the brake pedal 5 Shift automatic transmission to Neutral N or depress clutch on manual transmission 6 Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object depress the recessed transfer case Neutral N button for 4 seconds NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 373 7 After shift is completed and the Neutral N light comes on release Neutral N button 8 Start engine 9 Shift automatic transmission into Reverse R 10 Release brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement 11 Repeat s
58. another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 1 Latch Plate Latch Plate To Buckle 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE WARNING 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if itis too tight protect you properly The lap portion could ride too tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt high on your body possibly causing internal injuries ae e Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck in jury And a belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones w
59. battery explosion 3 Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle With Portable Starting Unit There are many types of these units available Follow the manufacturer s instructions for necessary precautions and operation CAUTION It is very important that the starting unit operating voltage does not exceed 12 Volts D C or damage to battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If vehicle becomes stuck in snow sand or mud it can often be moved by a rocking motion Move the gear selector rhythmically between DRIVE and REVERSE automatic transmissions and between 1st and RE VERSE manual transmissions while applying slight pressure to the accelerator NEE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 395 WARNING Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck In general the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine is most effective Racing the engine or spinning the wheels due to the frustration of not freeing the vehicle may lead to transmission over heating and failure Allow the engine to idle with the transmission selector in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmis sion failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED Your veh
60. cables or allow cable clamps to touch each other Set the parking brake and place an automatic transmis Keep open flames or sparks away from battery vent sion in PARK or NEUTRAL for a manual transmission holes Always wear eye protection when working Turn off lights heater and other electrical loads Observe with batteries charge indicator if equipped in both batteries If indica Do not use a booster battery or any other booster tor if equipped is light or yellow on either battery source that has a greater than 12 volt system i e do replace that battery not use a 24 volt power source 392 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this CAUTION Use the Jump Start Procedure only when the charge indicator if eguipped in both batteries is dark in the center Do not attempt jump starting when either could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result battery charge indicator if eguipped is bright or yellow If charge indicator if eguipped has a green dot in the center failure to start is not due to a DISCHARGED BATTERY discharged battery and cranking system should be checked BOOSTER BATTERY 1 Attach one jumper cable to the positive terminal of booster battery and the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery 80f122ab NEE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 393 2 Connect one end of the other jump
61. can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level MI TO EMPTY cannot be reset through the RESET button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value e When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display System Status EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC displays the following messages TURN SIGNALS ON with a continuous warning chime PERSONAL SETTINGS NOT AVAILABLE Vehicle Not in Park or Vehicle in Motion manual transmis sions only LEFT RIGHT FRONT DOOR AJAR one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 LEFT RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph DOOR S AJAR with a single chime if vehicle is in motion LOW WASHER FLUID with a single chime OIL CHANGE REQUIRED with a single chime CATALYST FULL SEE OWNER MANUAL CATALYST STAT MIN 90 CATALYS
62. cap and relieve the pressure from the cooling system To avoid burns remember that the engine components will stay hot after the engine is shut off Do not use gasoline or other flammable materials to clean parts Always use approved cleaning solvents Relieve all pressure in the fuel oil and cooling systems before any lines fittings or related items are removed or disconnected Be alert for possible pressure when disconnecting any device from a system that utilizes pressure Do not check for pressure leaks with your hand High pressure oil or fuel can cause personal injury WARNING Do not open the high pressure fuel system with the engine running Engine operation causes high fuel pressure High pressure fuel spray can cause serious injury or death e Important All maintenance other than that listed in this manual as well as some procedures listed here MUST be performed by your local Dodge Truck Dealer Your authorized Dodge Dealer has been trained and has the necessary parts to maintain your engine en MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the reguired maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely af
63. cold weather cover is available from your Mopar dealer Battery Blanket Usage A battery loses 60 of its cranking power as the battery temperature decreases to OF 18 For the same de crease in temperature the engine requires twice as much power to crank at the same RPM The use of 120 VAC powered battery blankets will greatly increase starting capability at low temperatures Suitable battery blankets are available from your authorized Mopar dealer Arctic Operation Where there are no provisions to keep the engine warm when it is operating in ambient temperatures consistently below 10 F 23 C use 5W 40 synthetic engine oil and fuel that meets the requirements in Section 7 Mainte nance Procedures Engine Oil Selection NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 279 Engine Warm Up Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is cold When starting a cold engine bring the engine up to operating speed slowly to allow the oil pressure to stabilize as the engine warms up NOTE High speed no load running of a cold engine can result in excessive white smoke and poor engine performance No load engine speeds should be kept under 1 200 rpm during the warm up period especially in cold ambient temperature conditions If temperatures are below 32 F 0 C operate the engine at moderate speeds for 5 minutes before full loads are applied Engine Idling In Cold Weather Avoid prolonged idling in ambient temperatures below 0
64. crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler Corporation such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers govern ment officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by DaimlerChrysler Corporation regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the US govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corpora tion to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
65. elec tronically controlled 5th and 6th Overdrive The trans mission will automatically shift from Drive to Overdrive if the following conditions are present e the transmission selector is in Drive e the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem perature e vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h e the TOW HAUL switch has not been activated e transmission has reached normal operating tempera ture NOTE If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem peratures the transmission may not shift into Overdrive and will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature Normal operation will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has risen to a suitable level Refer also to the Note under torque converter clutch later in this section If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot the transmission will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature If the transmission temperature becomes hot enough the TRANS TEMP light may illuminate After cool down the transmission will resume normal operation The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to Drive if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph 56 km h NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 289 When To Use TOW HAUL 1 Tow Haul Switch 2 AUTO 6 ERS Switch When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying
66. files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Specification Frequency kHz Bitrate Mbps 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 Beh aq 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 MPEG 2 Audio 112 96 80 64 Layer 3 24 220516 6 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 Playback of MP3 and WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 and WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Audio Play SEEK Button CD Mode for MP3 and WMA
67. filter from the underside of the vehicle using a cap style oil filter wrench Clean the gasket surface of the filter mount The filter gasket can stick on the filter mount Make sure it is removed Change the engine oil filter with every engine oil change Only a high quality MOPAR filter should be used to assure most efficient service CAUTION The filtering medium of other aftermarket filters may disintegrate Debris from failed filters may plug the piston oil cooling nozzles resulting in scuffed pistons and engine failure es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 CAUTION Fill the oil filter element with clean oil before instal lation Use the same type oil that will be used in the engine When filling the oil filter prevent foreign material from falling into the filter Severe engine damage may occur Apply a light film of lubricating oil to the sealing surface of the filter gasket before installing the filter CAUTION Overtightening may distort the threads or damage the filter element seal Install the filter as specified by the filter manufacturer Turn the filter 3 4 to one full turn after making contact with the gasket Check the condition of the threads and sealing surface on the oil pan and drain plug Install the drain plug and sealing washer and tighten to 37 ft lbs 50 N m Use only high quality multi grade lubricating oil in your Cummins Diesel Engine Choose the correct oil for your ope
68. flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel Recirculation Modes Panel or Bi Level e Select the recirculation modes when the outside air contains smoke or odors This feature allows for recircu GED lation of interior air only Air flows through the panel outlets in this mode siipscba Sit flows through the panel only or through both the panel and floor vents depending on the selected mode panel vs bi level Bi Level v Outside air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel and at the floor Mix tipe Outside air flows in equal proportions through the x floor and defroster outlets Defrost W Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield through the defroster outlets located at the base of the windshield and the demister outlets located at the edge of each side of the instrument panel 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE Blower Control EE 8 o NEN 816463cd The rotary knob on the left of the control panel is the blower control Turn the knob clockwise to one of the four positions to obtain the blower speed you desire To turn the blower off turn the knob to the far left posi tion Temperature Control 816463c9 The rotary knob at the center of the control panel controls the temperature of the interior air You can choose your degree of comfort by rotating the knob The coldest temperature setting is to the extr
69. follows 8 STUDS 80a58b1a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 389 1 Tighten the wheel nuts in the numbered sequence to a snug fit 2 Retighten the wheel nuts in the same sequence to the torques listed in the table Go through the sequence a second time to verify that specific torque has been achieved Retighten to specifications at 100 miles 160 km and after 500 miles 800 km It is recommended that wheel stud nuts be kept torqued to specifications at all times Torque wheel stud nuts to specifications at each lubrication interval Wheel Nuts All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to elimi nate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated This is especially important during the first few hundred miles of operation to allow the wheel nuts to become properly set All nuts should first be firmly seated against the 390 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M wheel The nuts should then be tightened to recom mended torque Tighten the nuts to final torque in increments Progress around the bolt circle tightening the nut opposite to the nut just previously tightened until final torque is achieved Recommended torques are shown in the following chart Disc Type Stud Torque Torque Wheels Nut Size Ft Lbs Newton Meters Cone 9 16 18 120 150 160 200 Flanged 9 16 18 130 160 190 220 To Stow The Flat Or Spare Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down Slide the
70. from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove 448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges and to protect your paint finish Take care never to of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and scratch the paint open e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is finish considered the responsibility of the owner e If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or CAUTION similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such re
71. from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction Grades The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions NEE F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 497 on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and no
72. heater built into the fuel filter housing aids in preventing fuel gelling It is controlled by a built in thermostat e A heated intake air system both improves engine starting and reduces the amount of white smoke generated by a warming engine Normal Starting Procedure Engine Manifold Air Temperature Above 66 F 19 C Observe the Instrument Panel Cluster lights when start ing the engine 1 Always apply the parking brake 2 Shift into PARK for an automatic transmission Fully depress and hold the clutch and shift into NEUTRAL for a manual transmission Models with manual transmis sion are equipped with a clutch interlocking cranking system The clutch must be fully depressed to start the vehicle 3 Turn the ignition key to the ON position and look at the instrument panel cluster lamps es STARTING AND OPERATING 271 CAUTION If WATER IN FUEL indicator light remains on DO NOT START engine before you drain water from the fuel filter to avoid engine damage See Section 7 Maintaining Your Vehicle for water drain procedures 4 Turn the ignition key to START and crank the engine Do not press the accelerator during starting CAUTION Do not crank engine for more than 15 seconds at a time as starter motor damage may result Turn key to OFF and wait at least two minutes before trying again 5 When the engine starts release the key 6 Check to see that there is oil pressure 7 Release the parki
73. id to be deleted p ones P System System Lists All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 819402e4 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEE Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Zero call one cancel two confirmation prompts three continue four delete five dial six download seven edit eight emergency nine English star erase all plus Espanol pound Francais add location help all home NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s language return to main menu return or main menu list names select phone select list phones send mobile set up phone settings or phone mute set up mute off towing assistance no pager new entry transfer call UConnect Tutorial try again pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes previous record again redial 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEE General Information i This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and VNE RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is
74. in which the transmitted sound causes the amplitude or height of the radio waves to vary and FM or Frequency Modulation in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 Electrical Disturbances Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during transmission They mainly affect the wave amplitude and thus remain a part of the AM reception They interfere very little with the freguency variations that carry the FM signal AM Reception AM sound is based on wave amplitude so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning power lines and neon signs FM Reception Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia tions interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out leaving the reception relatively clear which is the major feature of FM radio NOTE The radio steering wheel radio controls if equipped and 6 disc CD DVD changer if equipped will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE SALES CODE REF AM FM CD SINGLE DISC RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO AND HANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate SEEK p gt lt lt RW FF
75. leave an automatic transmission in Park a manual trans mission in Reverse or First gear Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the Parking Brake Release keys in the ignition A child could operate Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and Pic windows other controls or move the the gear shift lever is in the PARK position When veer j parking on a hill you should apply the parking brake Be sure the parking brake is fully disengage before placing the gear shift lever in PARK otherwise the Do E n ae d pus load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it Pes 5 difficult to move the selector out of PARK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 When parking on a hill turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle BRAKE SYSTEM If power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function However you will experience a substantial increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle If either the front or rear hydraulic systems lose normal capability the remaining system will
76. left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL ANCE will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak ers Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone balance and fade RND PTY Button Radio Mode Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds If no action is taken during the 5 second time out the PTY icon will turn off Pressing the PTY button or turning the TUNE rotary knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast PTY information Toggle the PTY button to select the following format types Program Type 16 ae No program e or un pend None Adult Hits Adult_Hits Alert Alert Alert Alert Classical Classical Classic Rock Classic_Rock College College Country Country Emergency Test Emergency Test Foreign Language Foreign Language Information Information 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PAN
77. loose tape insert the eraser end of a pencil into the tape drive gear and twist the pencil in the required directions Maintain your cassette tape player The head and capstan shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape deposits each time a cassette is played The result of deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap around and become lodged in the tape transport The other adverse condition is low or muddy sound from one or both channels as if the treble tone control were turned all the way down To prevent this you should periodically clean the head with a commercially available WET cleaning cassette As preventive maintenance clean the head about every 30 hours of use If you wait until the head becomes very dirty noticeably poor sound it may not be possible to remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 COMPACT DISC MAINTENANCE To keep the compact discs in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatu
78. of the frame For 2500 3500 4x4 series trucks when changing the front wheel assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube Place the jack under the axle as close to the tire as possible with the drive tubes extending to the front Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench When changing a rear wheel assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube Place the jack under the axle between the spring and the shock absorber with the drive tubes extending to the rear Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench Before raising the wheel off the ground make sure that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack position as required NOTE If the jack will not lower by turning the dial thumb wheel by hand it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in order to lower the jack 384 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 810ae77d JACKING LOCATION 817d213a 4X2 Jacking NEE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 385 WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle unstable and cause an accident It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 5 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off Install REAR the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end JACKING LOCATION of the nuts toward the wheel on 2500 3500 single rear 6e Ein wheel
79. or changing the wheel 382 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME e Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher Instructions e Block both the front and rear WARNING of the wheel diagonally oppo g site the jacking position For Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help example if the right front prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle wheel is being changed block e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the the left rear wheel edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle N BLOCKA e Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic NEE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 383 1 Remove the spare wheel jack and tools from storage 2 Using the wheel wrench loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 3 For 2500 3500 4x2 series trucks when changing a front wheel place the bottle jack under the frame rail behind the wheel Locate the jack as far forward as possible on the straight part
80. or under poor visibility 368 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE During snowplow usage on vehicles eguipped with an overhead console module the outside tempera ture display will show higher temperatures than the outside ambient temperature The higher displayed tem perature is due to blocked or reduced airflow to the underhood ambient temperature sensor by the snow plow This is common and outside temperature display operation will return to normal when the snowplow is removed General Maintenance Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with the plow manufacturer s instructions Keep all snowplow electrical connections and battery terminals clean and free of corrosion When plowing snow to avoid transmission and driv etrain damage the following precautions should be ob served e Operate with transfer case in 4L when plowing small or congested areas where speeds are not likely to exceed 15 mph 24 km h At higher speeds operate in 4H e Vehicles with 68RFE transmissions should use 4L range when plowing deep or heavy snow for extended periods of time to avoid transmission overheating e Do not shift the transmission unless the engine has returned to idle and wheels have stopped Make a practice of stepping on the brake pedal before shifting the transmission NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 369 CAUTION Internal damage to the transfer case will occur if a RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Recreational
81. performance charac teristics resulting in changes to steering han dling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and Alignment And Balance suspension components You could lose control Poor suspension alignment may result in and have an accident resulting in serious injury m or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with e Fast tire wear load ratings approved for your vehicle may result in false speedometer and odometer readings e Uneven tire wear such as feathering and one sided wear Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident e Vehicle pull to right or left Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having Alignment will not correct this condition See your dealer adequate speed capability can result in sudden for pr per diagnosis tire failure and loss of vehicle control prop 5 i 332 STARTING AND OPERATING Sx Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out of balance Proper balancing will reduce vibration and avoid tire cupping and spotty wear SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION IF EQUIPPED A light load vehicle condition is defined as tw
82. properly assure operator safety and prevent overloading vehicle systems WARNING Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely m affect performance of the airbag system in an acci dent Do not expect that the airbag will perform as described earlier in this manual CAUTION The Lamp Out indicator could illuminate if exte rior lamps are not properly installed 366 STARTING AND OPERATING M Before plowing e Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper fluid level e Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper tight ness e Check the runners and cutting edge for excessive wear The cutting edge should be 1 4 to 1 2 inch above ground in snow plowing position Check that snowplow lighting is connected and func tioning properly Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability For Information about snowplow applications visit www dodge com or refer to the current Dodge Body Builders Guide 1 The maximum number of occupants in the truck should not exceed two 2 The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear GAWR should never be exceeded 3 The snowplow prep packages are not available with the Sport Package 4 Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition of options or passengers etc The loaded vehicle weight including the snowplow system all aftermarket accessories driver passengers options and cargo must not exceed either the Gross Vehicle Weight GVWR or Gross Axle Weight GAWR rat
83. savings information is set 1 At the Main Menu screen highlight Clock Setup and press ENTER OR press and hold for 3 seconds the TIME button on the unit s faceplate The Clock Setup screen appears 2 To show the GPS clock select Displayed Clock GPS Clock and press ENTER 3 To adjust the time zone Select Time Zone and press ENTER Select the appropriate time zone and press ENTER 4 To turn daylight savings on or off select Daylight Savings and press ENTER Select On or Off and press ENTER 5 Select DONE to exit from the clock setting mode Press ENTER to save your changes If you press CANCEL or NAV then your changes will not be saved User Defined Clock If you wish to set the clock to a time different than the system clock you can manually adjust the time by choosing the User Defined Clock option 1 At the Clock Setup screen highlight Displayed Clock User Defined Clock 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Displayed Clock FM 92 5 On CHRYSLER DRE 81999ef6 2 To increase the clock by hours make sure HR is highlighted and press ENTER Press ENTER again to increase the clock by another hour You will see on the User Defined Time display the number of hours you have increased the clock by 3 To decrease the clock by one hour use the Select Encoder to highlight the sign Press ENTER Press ENTER again to decrease the clo
84. setting of the Tone Fade and Balance See Radio Mode AM FM Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Switches the Radio to the Radio mode RND PTY Button Random Play Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the tracks Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Buttons 1 6 CD MODE for CD Audio Play Selects disc positions 1 6 for Play Load Bject NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CD ROM CD R and CD RW Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The
85. station until you make another selec tion Holding the button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it MUTE Button Radio Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will display Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control turning the radio ON OFF or turning ON OFF the ignition will cancel the MUTE feature NOTE In Hands Free Phone if equipped mode the MUTE button mutes the microphone SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time PSCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan through preset stations in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each preset station before continuing to the next To stop the search press PSCAN a second time Time Button Press the time button and the time of day will display for 5 seconds 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the time button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Audio control 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side Tune Audio control to set
86. station until you make another selection Holding the button and will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds satellite scan 8 seconds at each listenable station before continu ing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time Time Button Press the time button and the time of day will display for 5 seconds Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the time button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Audio control 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side Tune Audio control to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Audio control 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds INFO Button Radio Mode Press the INFO button for an RBDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast if available from an FM station FM mode only 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the rewind fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satel lite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the right side rotary contr
87. subject to the em It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area following conditions inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people e This device may not cause harmful interference riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and SEATS using a seat belt properly The seating options available in this truck are the result of extensive customer research and evaluations Seats are also a primary part of the Occupant Restraint protection System of the vehicle They need to be used properly for safe operation of the vehicle es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 40 20 40 Front Seat Manual Seat Adjuster As the name implies the seat is divided into 3 segments The outboard seat portions are each 40 of the total width of the seat The back of the center portion 20 easily folds down to provide an armrest center storage compartment if equipped Each outboard seat is independently adjustable forward or rearward and is equipped with a back recliner The manual forward or rearward seat adjustment handle is found at the front edge of each seat cushion Pull up on the handle and slide the seat to get the mo
88. systems equipped with LATCH attachments in the center position of a Quad Cab model rear seat The LATCH anchorages in this seat are designed for the two outboard seating posi tions only A child may be placed in the rear center seating position of a Quad Cab model using the seat belt and child tether anchorage Failure to follow this may result in serious or fatal injury NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rearward facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook and means for adjusting the tension in the strap In general you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether anchorages Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here Again carefully follow the instruc tions that come with the child restraint system WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
89. the MSG or INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the MSG or INFO button while in the message display priority mode or elapsed time display priority mode will display the song title for each file RW FF CD Mode for MP3 Play Press the FF side of the button to move forward through the MP3 selection TUNE Control CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of Tone Balance and Fade NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 AM FM Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Switches back to Radio mode RND PTY Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing this button plays files randomly SET DIR Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Press the SET DIR Button to display folders when playing an MP3 discs that have a file folder structure Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or move through available folders Press the TUNE control to select a folder Buttons 1 6 CD Mode for MP3 Play Selects disc positions 1 6 for Play Load FEject Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s mm Manual Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNN
90. the brake pedal should extinguish the red brake light 20 ABS Warning Light GE This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System which is described elsewhere in this manual This light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and may stay on for five seconds If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is reguired See your autho rized dealer immediately The ABS light could also illuminate during loss of traction and remain illuminated until the brake pedal is pressed 21 Cargo Light The Cargo Lamp light will illuminate when the Cargo Lamp is activated by pressing the Cargo N Light Button on the headlight switch 22 Electronic Throttle Control ETC This light informs you of a problem with the A Electronic Throttle Control system If a prob lem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see your dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and rem
91. the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 SEEK Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left side of the button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection MUTE Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will be displayed Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control turning the radio ON OFF or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers SCAN Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 LOAD EJECT Button CD Mode for CD Audio Play LOAD EJECT Load Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays LOAD DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc LOAD EJT Eject Press the LOAD EJT button and the push a button with the corre
92. the exposed tape side toward the left and the mechanical action of the player will gently pull the cassette into the play position NOTE When subjected to extremely cold temperatures the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warm up for proper operation Sometimes poor playback may be experienced due to a defective cassette tape Clean and demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year Seek Button Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the tape and down to return to the beginning of the current selection Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track number to skip forward or backward 1 to 6 selections Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection twice to move 2 selections etc NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 Fast Forward FF Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape in the direction that it is playing The tape will advance until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is reached At the end of the tape the tape will play in the opposite direction Rewind RW Press the RW button momentarily to reverse the tape direction The tape will reverse until the button is pressed again or until the end of the tape is reached At the end of the tape the tape will play in the opposite direction Tape Eject Press this button and the cassette will disen gage and eject from the radio TAPE Scan Button Press this button to play 10 seconds of each selection Press t
93. to either extreme left or right and remains there during normal driving the electrical sys tem should be serviced NOTE If the gauge pointer moves to either extreme of the gauge the Check Gages indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound NOTE e The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at vari ous engine temperatures This cycling operation is caused by the post heat cycle of the intake manifold heater system The number of cycles and the length of the cycling operation is controlled by the engine control module Post heat operation can run for sev eral minutes and then the electrical system and volt meter needle will stabilize e The cycling action will cause temporary dimming of the headlamps interior lamps and also a noticeable reduction in blower motor speed 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3 Turn Signal Indicators Lights in instrument cluster flash when outside turn signals are operating 4 Tachometer The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute CAUTION Do not operate the engine with the tachometer pointer at high rpm for extended periods Engine damage may occur 5 Airbag Indicator Light The indicator lights and remains lit for 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition is first turned on If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the airbag system checked by an authorized dealer 6 High Beam Indicator E This indicator shows that
94. to say a four digit pin number which you will later need to enter into your cellular en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 You can enter any four digit pin number You will not need to remember this pin number after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7 1 being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your UConnect System The priority allows the UConnect system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the UConnect system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity Dial by Saying a Number Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial System will prompt you to say the number you want call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The phone number that you enter must be of valid length and combination Ba
95. two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEE Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the Voice Recogni tion button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the Phone button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed on your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last numbe
96. under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 3 of this manual for details e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle 2 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed i e functional key fob 3 Continue to hold the UNLOCK button wait at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the LOCK button Release both buttons at the same time 4 To reactivate this feature repeat the above steps 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE Using the Panic Alarm To activate the Panic mode while the ignition is OFF press and release the PANIC button on the transmitter once When the Panic mode is activated the interior lights will illuminate the headlamps and parking lights will flash and the horn will sound To cancel the Panic mode press and release the PANIC button on the transmitter a second time after 5 seconds Panic mode will automatically cancel after 3 minutes or if the vehicle is started and exceeds 15 mph During the Panic Mode the door locks and remote keyless entry systems will function normally Panic mode will not disarm the security system on vehicles so equipped General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This d
97. when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scald ing or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433 community Do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground Prevent ingestion by animals and children If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine cold the level of the coolant in the coolant recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing coolant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When addit
98. will go to the previous tuner mode INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Press and INFO button while playing MP3 or WMA disc The radio scrolls through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if avail able Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button while in the message display priority mode or elapsed time display priority mode will display the song title for each file RW FF CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play Press the FF side of the button to move forward through the file or MP3 and WMA selection TUNE Control CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of Tone Balance and Fade NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 AM FM Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Switches back to Radio mode RND PTY Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing this button plays files randomly SET DIR Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Press the SET DIR Button to display folders when playing an MP3 discs that have a file folder structure Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or move through available folders Press the TUNE control to select a folder Buttons 1 6 CD Mode for MP3 Play Selects disc positions 1 6 for Play Load FEject Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mo
99. with the vehicle s audio system The volume of the UConnect system can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so eguipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect M menu structure Voice commands are reguired after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to some one sitting eight feet away
100. with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Don t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four or 6 in case of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs en STARTING AND OPERATING 327 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failur
101. you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you Remove the jack and tools by removing the wing bolt and sliding the asse need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location 380 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING After using the jack and tools always reinstall them in the original carrier and location While driving You may experience abrupt stopping rapid accelera tion or sharp turns A loose jack tools bracket or other objects in the vehicle may move around with force resulting in serious injury JACKING INSTRUCTIONS Removing The Spare Tire Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack the truck Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube Insert the tube through the access hole between the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch mechanism tube Rotate the wheel wrench handle coun terclockwise until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle When the spare is clear tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull i
102. you want to rest or sleep in your car Accidents can be caused by inadvertently moving the gear selection lever or by pressing the accelerator pedal This may cause excessive heat in the exhaust system resulting in overheating and vehicle fire which may cause serious or fatal injuries WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Manual Transmission If Equipped Apply the parking brake place the gearshift control lever m in NEUTRAL and depress the clutch pedal to the floor before starting the vehicle This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system It will not start unless the clutch is fully depressed Automatic Transmission If Equipped Start the engine with the selector lever in NEUTRAL or PARK position Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range 270 STARTING AND OPERATING Sx The Cummins Diesel engine is eguipped with several features designed to assist cold weather starting and operation e The engine block heater is a resistance heater installed in the water jacket of the engine just above and behind the oil filter It requires a 110 115 volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord NOTE The engine block heater cord is a factory in stalled option If your vehicle is not equipped heater cords are available from your authorized Mopar dealer e A 12 volt
103. 07 Navigation Radio 2 cage aeeai ee ee Maintenance Schedule EE ee 477 Navigation System ee ee ee ee ee ee Manual Service 0 cc ees 495 New Vehicle Break In Period Manual Transmission 292 439 Noise Control Fluid Level Check 0 0 0 00 ce ewes 439 Maintenance i secara km RR eR ES Lubricant Selection sus as 006004 esa es 473 Tampering Prohibited Shift Speeds wc v es eras ERENS 293 Noise Emission Warranty Map Reading Lights 04 144 Eise EE OE ER RS Oe RR 84 Occupant Restraints ee ee Ee EE ee Automatic Dimming ss EE ee EE ee 85 Odometer sasareanna Pedi Aa N ee ee 135 510 INDEX ME THD cess EO EE PEST es 192 199 Off Pavement Driving Of Road 308 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 308 Oil Change Indicator 147 149 478 Oil Change Indicator Reset llus 149 Oil Engine cesis e SR RE RR AE EG Rer de 471 Capacity n EN RE RE e e sd quae des es 470 Change Interval ee ee ee es ee ee 408 Bid EE EE mg 407 Disposal sis cer ene ai ARE Re N Re RE 412 Filter ws nr Seta es 407 410 471 Identification Logo 1 6 EE EE EE ee 408 Materials Added to 000005 409 Pressure Gauge ea keke ek does ceed 191 Recommendation eese 408 oyntlietie sed ars beret ta ald boa dns 409 Viscosily sae BREER ER EERDER EDS rebi Ea 409 Oi
104. 09 It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect phone book UConnect phone book nametag recognition rate is optimized for the person who stored the name in the phone book You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be spoken eight zero zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNENEEEEEEE Far End Audio Performance e Audio guality is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed low road noise smooth road surface fully closed windows and dry weather condition operation from driver seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the UConnect system e Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the UConnect system When this happens the connec tion can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cell phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth on mode
105. 2 Tail amp StOP ss eu xa BERE x ye Gg 3057 Cab Clearance Lights do EE EE EE EE EE ee 168 Dual Rear Wheel Sidemarker Light 168 Dual Rear Wheel Tailgate ID Lights 3 168 BULB REPLACEMENT Headlight Halogen Front Park and Turn Lights CAUTION This is a halogen bulb Avoid touching the glass with your fingers Reduced bulb life will result 458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx 1 Open the hood 3 Remove the plug from the inner fender well and remove the nut through the access hole 2 Remove the two 2 bolts from the front of the head light housing 8163ba1d Inner Fender Plug Front Headlight Housing Bolts MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459 NOTE For easier removal pull the headlight assembly straight forward applying the greatest amount of force to the outer edge of the headlight assembly Rear Headlight Housing Nut Access 4 Pull the housing out from the fender to allow room to disconnect the electrical connectors Headlight Removal 460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Bulb Removal 81906efb 5 Unlock and pull connector straight from the base of the headlight halogen bulb 6 Twist connector on the side marker turn signal park light bulb 1 4 turn and remove connector and bulb from housing 7 Remove housing from vehicle with headlight halogen bulb in housing 8 Twist the headlight halogen bulb turn and remove headlight bulb from the housing 9 Replace head
106. 33 These cautions apply to all chain traction devices includ ing link and cable radial chains Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires of Ram 4X2 trucks NOTE The use of class U chains is permitted on the front and rear of 4X4 2500 Ram Trucks with LT245 70R17E tires NOTE The use of class U chains is permitted on the front and rear of 4X4 3500 Ram Trucks with Dual Rear Wheels and LT235 80R17E tires NOTE On 4X2 2500 3500 Ram Trucks class U snow chains are permitted on the rear wheels only of vehicles equipped with LT245 70R17 LT265 70R17 and LT235 80R17 size tires NOTE On 4X4 2500 3500 Single Rear Wheel SRW Ram Trucks class U snow chains are permitted on the rear wheels only of vehicles equipped with LT265 70R17 CAUTION Do not use tire chains on 4x4 Ram trucks equipped with P265 70R17 LT275 70R17 tires There may not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle Do not use tire chains on the 4X2 front wheels of 2500 3500 SRW Single Rear Wheels equipped with LT245 70R17 LT265 70R17 tires or 4X4 front tires of Ram Trucks equipped with LT265 70R17tires There may not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle 334 STARTING AND OPERATING M SNOW TIRES Snow tires should be of the same size and type construc tion as the front tires Consult the manufacturer of t
107. 358 STARTING AND OPERATING M 2 GTW Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage 3 GAWR before towing a trailer Refer to the Tires General Information section of this manual on Tread Wear 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized Indicators for the proper inspection procedure This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight When replacing tires refer to the Tires General Infor mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires for proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires Towing Requirements Tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact Een IOVIS ad OMIE ae spare tire Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to the vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer Tires General Information section of this manual on This could cause inadequate braking and possible Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures personal injury Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is pressures before trailer usage required when towing a trailer with electronically NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 3
108. 396 Emission Control System Maintenance 476 Engine sascracieni var RUE EE EE 402 Air Cleaner 4 42 69 999 9 m bin RE has 413 Block Heater 0 000000 aes 270 277 Break In Recommendations 74 Compartment essan ee BERE png AR IR bu 402 Coolant Antifreeze 00 eee 471 COOMNG EERSTE Ee 429 Data Plate ies 04 6604s ORE na eae oh eas 404 Identification SE SEE ES ee 402 Iding cusam oye hie hs ea ae 279 Jump Starting ius ag WE RPG EE 391 DiE AE mE RIS 407 471 Oil Filler Cap seapea gine Sao dose EE 409 Oil Syntheti sers se eR Rep EX Es 278 409 Runaway iiscckes kid El DAP base X eras 342 Temperature Gauge 0 EE eee 191 Event Data Recorder SS SS Se 59 Exhaust Brake SS SS Se ee se 283 Exhaust Gas Caution SS 76 182 428 Exhaust System 0000 76 428 444 Exterior Lighting 1 3 20 94 0420 EL ERR PS 132 Fabric Gare as dede Y ue dae 449 NEE INDEX 505 Fan 6x peach Paced em RSA A Pa EE rad 434 Filters Closed Crankcase Ventilation CCV 420 Engine Qil eis ees RR r6 bg 407 410 471 Flashers Turm Signal yes aie ata eke Be ur Canale gs 135 Flat Tire Stowage llle 380 390 Fluid Brake sc owacdece hos xe REESE 473 Fluid Capacities eie ee EE ee 470 Fluid Level Checks Brake deo ER eee en AE ee ee 436 Manual Transmission 439 Power Steering 52s KEER REED N EE DE e 424 Transfer Case sererek a SS ens 439
109. 4 Trailer and Tongue Weight 355 WITING a EE EE EE EPES 359 Trailer Towing Guide lees 355 Trailer Weight 516 INDEX ME Transaxle Automa ies se ex RE ws de ae deg 12 Manual et Ee RR R3 EEG beg Cara 14 Transfer Case Electronically Shifted oe EE ee 298 Gie AO OE ae Fe RO OE N 473 Transmission Automate 4 cecen4 4044 kan dees hae on 285 440 Fluid seta cad EE HE EE EE was 473 Maintenance llle 440 Manual 2 352 3 484 ERR ER Y 269 292 439 vhisiri DR 285 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry llli 25 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 154 Tread Wear Indicators 0 000 eee 329 Trip Odometer ss er SEE DRR Res 192 199 Turn Signals se RAS GE RR ake 135 190 457 462 UConnect Hands Free Phone 89 Underhood Fuses 1 2 0 0000 00 eee eee 451 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 496 Universal Transmitter 00 154 Variance Compass a mese ra ataru EE eee eee 153 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 8 Vehicle Information Center 4 145 Vehicle Loading 000 320 347 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Vehicle Storage ik ER Rp RE HE DER SG ekes 456 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video System 05 242 Viscosity Engine Oil 2 2 ee 409 Voltmeter 4 2 er doe RR OE RR es 189 276 NEE INDEX 517 Warning Lights Instrum
110. 443 Noise Control System Required Maintenance amp Warranty se ae ee ME RR yy N p RES 443 Appearance Care And Protection From COTTOSIOR 2a na RRE SO EER ESE EES 447 ll Fuses Integrated Power Module 451 NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 a Vehicle Storage 224 e RR bey onus 456 Tailgate ID Lights Dual Rear Wheels N Replacement Light Bulbs 457 THEQUIDDEG san tw SERS EA ata a B Bulb Replacement ie e Td E pud 457 Side Marker Lights Dual Rear Wheels 469 Fog lights csse 461 Bd Capacit s sss aes dor ER ave as 470 Tail Stop Turn And Backup Lights 462 Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 471 Center High Mounted Stoplight CHMSL BASIE uade deat eA eee d en e ach A71 With Cargo Light speed sea nure rioa siais 464 et EE EE ELE OE 473 Cab Top Clearance Lights If Equipped 466 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 6 7L DIESEL ENGINE AUTOMATIC CLUTCH MASTER ENGINE ENGINE BRAKE FLUID CYLINDER BATTERY MANUAL ONLY BATTERY TRANSMISSION OIL FILL OIL DIPSTICK DIPSTICK RESERVOIR POWER AIR RADIATOR AIRCLEANER STEERING FLUID CLEANER CAP FILTER MINDERTM RESERVOIR BOTTLE cooLANr INTEGRATED WINDSHIELD POWER MODULE WASHER FLUID NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
111. 5 3 Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is ON not flashing shift transmission back into gear release clutch on manual transmissions NOTE If steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift then the desired position indicator light will flash con tinuously while the original position indicator light is ON until all requirements have been met NOTE The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing NOTE If your are leaving your vehicle stored for longer than 21 days refer to the section on Vehicle Storage LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL IF EQUIPPED The limited slip differential provides additional traction on snow ice mud sand and gravel particularly when there is a difference between the traction characteristics of the surface under the right and left rear wheels During normal driving and cornering the limited slip unit per forms similarly to a conventional differential On slip pery surfaces however the differential delivers more of the driving effort to the rear wheel having the better traction The limited slip differential is especially helpful during slippery driving conditions With both rear wheels on
112. 59 actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with WARNING a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys lbs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes lbs 907 kg when you need them and could have an accident CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher Towing Requirements Trailer Lights amp Wiring brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety 360 STARTING AND OPERATING The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must ma
113. 63c0 Dual Zone Temperature Control Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment This is accomplished by having separate temperature control slides for both the driver and front passenger The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures Circulation The cab is designed with features to promote outside air circulation There are grilles in the cab back panel These are air exhausters that provide the means for regular exchange of cab air Side window demisters direct air flow specifically to the window glass to help prevent interior fogging of the glass They are located in the extreme outside upper edges of the instrument panel The demisters also pro vide extra air ducts for circulation They are in operation whenever the Floor Mix or Defrost modes are in use NOTE When you turn off the engine you may hear a hissing sound from under the hood for a short period of time This is a normal condition that occurs if the air conditioning system has been on It is not an indication of a problem with the air conditioning system 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE Rear Air Duct Mega Cab Only Mega Cab Rear Air Duct The rear seat will receive air flow in all modes except for Defrost The rear air duct is designed to be pointed up when in A C mode and pointed down in Heat mode Ope
114. 7 174 Heated Seats 0 cee ee eee 127 Heatef se i s Re ER urban ER ee Ee eg RE 252 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 136 Hitches Trailer Towing ii ses es e km en 354 Hoisting as ss is ed cae ede ERR X RS 390 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter Hood Release SE ee se 129 HOSES 3 23 6 44 48 EER oS REDE RE wer Ede 435 438 Hub Caps i MEE eat ate ace oer eee ae see Gees 386 Hydraulic Clutch Fluid 04 438 Ipr t n geet dota goad re SE Se Ewe ee gs 12 KEY 3 EE RE AL Oe 12 Ignition Key Removal lesse 12 NENNEN INDEX 507 Illuminated Entry ss ee 00000000 20 Immobilizer Sentry Key lesse 15 Infant Restraint 0 eee eee 61 62 Inflation Pressure Tires llle 332 Information Center sasaaa aaa 145 Information Center Vehicle SS se 145 Inside Rearview Mirror ie is Es ee 84 Instrument Cluster 0000005 188 189 Instrument Panel and Controls 187 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 450 Integrated Power Module Fuses 451 Interior Appearance Care girata saia sia 449 Interior Lights 4 2 oos RR BERE 3 131 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 137 Intervention Regeneration Strategy 419 IntroduetiO 4 ur sa ead as Gee a REA ERU 4 Jack Location 5 eue RS RERUR EER Maan bad 379 Jack Operation i cedere ee Re DEPO E Y 381 Jum
115. BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNENEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE H H INNER ANCHOR STRAP RING S TETHER STRAP REAR CENTER i DRIVER S SIDE CHILD SEAT REAR CHILD SEAT Multiple Child Restraints NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Tether Anchorage Points at All Three Seating Positions Mega Cab TETHER STRAP HOOK 1 Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back under the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat TETHER STRAP TO 2 Lift the cover and attach the hook to the sguare CHILD RESTRAINT opening in the sheet metal 3 Install the child restraint and remove the slack in the tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions 8166253c Mega Cab Tether Anchor 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck
116. Control seser EE EE EE EE EE ee 131 508 INDEX Se InteriOf sacks cache eee gba dae ER NEER De 131 Lights On Reminder 000 134 EE ER hae a ER ds 136 Reading se ARE EE SERE EE coment enone 144 Seat Belt Reminder EE EE Ee 190 ond qM aye PC Si are BY RE AE N 457 Side Marker llle 469 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 196 Transfer Case 1 ee ee 298 Transmission Warning sisse 198 Tum Signal rwn 135 190 457 462 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 189 Limited Slip Differential 305 439 Loading Vehicle lt RR ae Pea ER RR nen 347 AR EE EE ee 319 LOCKS pr DE ee EE GE 26 Child Protection isi iss eti esida mn 30 DOO lt i dace KORE Ak oe Sah e Xu EE 26 Kers TP 12 en INDEX 509 Power DOOF 2 6 04 str e m Rm Ee 27 Electric Powered 0 0000055 Steering Wheel si eatin ete e be RRs 18 Outside oc SE Aue OEY ah eee ie EE Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Rearview SS pinia eee LATCH soinen phin ERIR De RE Eg ete ER 65 Trailer 10WiNg ie es ee cae ene eme Lubrication Body ees 426 Modifications Alterations Vehicle bug Nuts 223b owas oes area c a CA TR N ee 385 Monitor Tire Pressure System Lumbar Support eese 120 Mopar Parts sets ee e ed Resa serius Multi Function Control Lever Maintenance leere 404 Maintenance Procedures see ees Ee ee 4
117. DERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated Sideview Mirrors If Equipped The Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated side view mirrors are activated by pressing the heated grid button located on the Climate Control panel with the ignition On Turning Off the rear window defroster or the ignition will deactivate the Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated side view mirrors feature These features turn off automatically after 15 minutes have elapsed for the first activation per ignition cycle Each subsequent activation of these features per ignition cycle will shutoff automatically after 10 minutes have elapsed To reactivate simply press the button again Trailer Towing Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror head to provide a greater vision range when towing extra wide loads To change position inboard or outboard the mirror head should be rotated flipped Out or In A small blindspot mirror is integrated onto the main mirror surface 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE Fold the 7 x 10 inch trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to entering an automated car wash gt Trailer Towing Position Blindspot Mirror en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EGUIPPED NOTE The sales code RER radio contains an inte grated Hands Free Communication UConnect
118. EE STARTING AND OPERATING 357 WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chas sis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in P for Park With a manual transmission shift the transmission into reverse And with four wheel drive vehicles make sure the transfer case is not in neutral Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR
119. EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE SALES CODE RAK AM FM CASSETTE CD 6 DISC RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO HANDS FREE PHONE VIDEO MP3 and WMA CAPABILITIES NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate 6 DISC MP3 WMA 81322436 RAK Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played Mode Button Radio Mode Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the CD player Cassette Satellite or Vehicle Entertainment System VES if equipped NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 SEEK Button Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped mode Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down The radio will remained tuned to the new
120. EL M Religious Music Jazz Jazz News News Nostalgia Nostalgia Oldies Oldies Personality Personality Public Public Rhythm and Blues Rhythm_and_Blues Religious_Music Religious Talk Religious_Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft_Rock Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft_R_ amp B Sports Sports Talk Talk Top 40 Top_40 Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected PTY name The PTY function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the PTY Program Type mode the PTY mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SET DIR Button Radio Mode To Set the Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET DIR button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET DIR button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET DIR button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button ca
121. EM AIRBAG OFF ER 3 c 2 0 O cw A de a vt 4WD BRAKE WINDSHIELD LIFTGATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC BRAKE SYSTEM ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW ELECTRICALLY PARKLIGHTS REARFOG LAMP ANDLIFTGATE DEFROSTAND VENTILATINGFAN WINDOWLOCK THROTTLE FOURWHEEL WARNING PARKING DEFROST HEATED OPEN LOWER AIR OUTLET CONTROL DRIVE BRAKE DOOR AJAR favre Dat 1 N LeU E e FEP VOICE BATTERY HEATEDMIRROR WINDSHIELD INSTUMENTPANEL SEAT BELT SLIDINGDOOR TRUNK DECK AIRCONDITIONING CHILD SEAT RECOGNITION WARNING MALFUNCTION CONVERTIBLE CHARGING DEFROST ILLUMINATION RELEASE TETHER ANCHOR BUTTON INDICATOR LIGHT TOP DOWN Ad P e G oT Sw A n L amp OW Ge sm LOWER ANCHORS GLOW PLUG POWER WINDSHIELD WIPER SIDE AIRBAG AIRBAG SLIDING DOOR EMERGENCY LIGHTER AND TETHER FOR UCONNECT TRANS CONVERTIBLE INTAKEAIR STEERINGFLUID AND WASHER RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH BUTTON OIL TEMP TOP UF HEATER bo HORN m SEE OWNER S MANUAL 180 DIESEL EXHAUST BRAKE ae CARGO LAMP 81b8d09e NEE INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures which could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures which could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VAN CONVERSIONS CAMPERS The Manufacturer s Warranty does not apply to body modifications or special e
122. ER KAUTION The removable ash receiver is located in the instrument Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off panel cup holder tray e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventu ally if plugged in long enough the vehicle s As a child safety precaution the lighter only operates battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade with the ignition switch ON It heats when pushed in and battery life and or prevent engine starting pops out automatically when ready for use To preserve the heating element do not hold the lighter in the heating position The cigar lighter is located on the instrument panel above and to the left of the ash receiver Accessories that draw higher power i e cool ers vacuum cleaners lights etc will dis charge the battery even more quickly Only use these intermittently and with greater cau tion After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 Ash Tray Automatic Transmission Ash Tray Manual Transmission 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEE CUPHOLDERS Front Instrument Panel Cupholders 40 20 40 Seats Automat
123. ES assembly to access the bulb FLUID CAPACITIES US Metric 4 Pull bulb straight out from socket Fuel 5 Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and hous 2900 hor Den Models 34 gal 8L ing 2500 Longbed Models 35 gal 132L 3500 Shortbed Models 34 gal 128L 3500 Longbed Models 35 gal 132L Engine Oil 6 7L HO Turbo Diesel Engine I 6 SAE 15W 40 API CJ 4 Certified that 12 qts 11 4L meets CES 20081 Stan dards Cooling System 6 7L Turbo Diesel Engine 22 6 qts 21 4L I 6 NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Engine Coolant Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Or ganic Additive Technology or equivalent 6 7L Turbo Diesel Engine Oil Use SAE 15W 40 API CJ 4 Certified that meets CES 20081 Standards Engine Oil Filter 6 7L Turbo Die Mopar Engine Oil Filter P N 05083285AA or equivalent sel Engine Engine Fuel Filter 6 7L Turbo Mopar Fuel Filter P N 05183410AA or equivalent Must meet 7 micron rat Diesel Engine ing Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufacturers filtration and water separating requirements can severely impact fuel system life and re liability Crankcase Ventilation Filter 6 7L Mopar CCV Filter P N 68001433AA or equivalent Turbo Diesel Engine 472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Compo
124. F or MAX A C e The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Be aware of changes in the sound of the exhaust system exhaust fumes detected inside the vehicle or damage to the underside or rear of the vehicle Have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adja cent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace or adjust as required NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Heater Defroster Ducts Inspect the heater defroster ducts for proper operation Check for proper air flow through all defroster ducts If there are any question regarding the operation of your heater defroster ducts have the system checked by an authorized dealer Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc or if the front airbags have deployed If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airb
125. Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 471 Fog Lights a sic asia E pem erp hes 134 193 461 Fold Flat Load Floor llle 176 Four Wheel Drive llle 294 Four Way Hazard Flasher 378 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ee ee ee ee ee 394 Front Axle Differential 426 438 OE RE ee aee eee 342 344 Adding aga adage ER RR ER HE deme hy 344 Diesel sas ET enric rinra ssi 342 344 471 GAUSS KEER Eie RR GE Sar EO A 199 Er EE EE REX EE 199 Requirements or tie trih EE EE ee 342 Specifications c4 oneness ee eR Eee ER EE 343 Tank Capacity ce ola BEER eene g EEES 470 lg EE IE 451 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 154 Gauges Om 189 Coolant Temperature llle 191 Fuel D CIT 199 Oil Pressure i e e 0449 Ie DER PRE 191 Speedometer orrien eaire iE EI wd EET 190 Tachometer 506 INDEX NENNEN 189 285 Voltmeter Gear Ranges General Information Glass Cleaning Grocery Bag Retainer Gross Axle Weight Rating Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Guide Body Builders GVWR Hands Free Phone UConnect Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water Hazard Warning Flasher Head Restraints Headlights High Beam High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 276 293 Lights On Reminder 000 134 Passing visi ae Foe Sele ols Dawe ste cas 136 Switi M a eit chars BEE toe win ds ae sie RE 132 Heated Mirrors 0 0 00 cece se 8
126. H E D U L E S 8 478 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the exhaust system e Inspect the brake hoses e Inspect the U Joints if eguipped and front suspen sion components e Check the automatic transmission fluid level e Check the manual transmission fluid level e Check the coolant level hoses and clamps e Lubricate outer tie rod ends 4X4 models only e Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting 4X4 Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all re ceipts Oil Change Indicator System Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system This system will alert you when it is time to change your engine oil by displaying the words Oil Change Required on your Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate depending on your per sonal driving style Driving styles such as frequent stop and go type driving can increase the frequency of the engine oil change This is the result of more frequent regeneration of the exhaust aftertreatment system which can decrease the life of the engine oil Failure to change the engine oil per the maintenance schedule can result in internal engine damage NEE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 479 For information on resetting the Oil Change Indicator
127. ING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which ENGINE DATA PLATE Use the information from the engine data plate when discussing service or sourcing parts for your engine The engine data plate is located on the intake side of the breather cover DEALER SERVICE Your dealer has the gualified service personnel special tools and eguipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic SERVICE INFORMATION Mopar Fluids Lubricants and Parts are available from your dealer and will help you keep your vehicle operat ing at its best Your dealer also has the qualified service personnel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service manuals are available which include detailed service information es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempt ing any procedure yourself See Service Publications information at the back of this manual
128. Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States 2 2 0 2 eh Ee KR55120123 Canadas sie Veh Hasse AlN ER TRUE 2671 5120123 342 STARTING AND OPERATING M ENGINE RUNAWAY WARNING In case of engine runaway due to flammable fumes from gasoline spills or turbocharger oil leaks being sucked into the engine do the following to help avoid personal injury and or vehicle damage 1 Shut off engine ignition switch 2 Using a CO or dry chemical type fire extin guisher direct the spray from the fire extinguisher into the grille on the passenger side so that the spray enters the engine air intake The inlet for the engine air intake is located behind the passenger side headlamp and receives air through the grille FUEL REQUIREMENTS Fuel Requirements 6 7L Diesel Engines Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle Federal law requires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel 15 ppm Sulfur maximum and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel 500 ppm Sulfur maximum to avoid damage to the emissions control system For most year round service No 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specificat
129. NEN INDEX 515 Inflation Pressures llle 324 Jacking 5 EE TE OE HE T 381 Lite of Ties iese eed 4 dae ER RE Ee RR REG 329 Load Capacity ee EE EE dii ais 319 320 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 336 Pressure Warning Light 196 Quality Grading 0 000000 496 Radial ssa gs iuh o ga ORR RP E EG 326 Replacement es Eis RE ERG m igne 330 ROtatiOEi 2 Sue scs eR e NUS OUS In SC e ES 334 Safety usse EUR redet ee RR 315 323 SIZES sed REIS ORDE NIS EN PES 316 Snow Tires 42323522 204544 o Pie Ped d 334 Spare Tire a i esce eee ek dU RO Red ed 380 SPINNING eb Shoe nd 28 RUP EA a E e Rog race 328 Tread Wear Indicators 0 0005 329 Wheel Mounting ss sus as eriad E PS RES 381 Wheel Nut Torque ills 385 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 355 Torque Converter Clutch 004 290 Tow Hooks Emergency sees 395 TOW EAU 5 2 epearen er ana d eta dius as 289 TOWING 6 006 denk BE ERROR N Er edd 350 Disabled Vehicle SS SEE Se at 306 Guide RE a Bik arem ER RE ae Oe AE EE ATE 355 Recreational SEE mupya erh 369 Weight ceci OE dered EE OE 355 Tractioh ies EERS ER renta ER RR DER RR LGURges 306 Traction Control ES eee 439 Trailer TOWNE ie ster ad eae Pes ee ea eh RS 350 Cooling System Tips 000 363 FAMCHES manie BESLIS Pe REELE Tues 354 Minimum Requirements 05 356 Mirrors cese 2 oA oe Me RE Red eh Se 87 36
130. NING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid Screen Display 1 2 3 4 5 6 D Actual Gear s 1 1 2 1 3 14 1 5 1 6 1 6 Allowed NOTE To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration engine braking simply press and hold the switch down The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops or during acceleration when the transmission downshifts to second gear the clutch automatically disengages NOTE The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm usually after 1 3 miles 1 6 4 8 km of driving Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmission es STARTING AND OPERATING 291 is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is normal Pressing the TOW HAUL button when the transmis sion is sufficiently warm will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and
131. NNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEE To fold either rear seat flat Kneel Mode lift the handle and fold the seat forward Simply lift the seat back to return the seat to the upright position Verify that it is locked in place Kneel Mode ERSE Kneel Mode Handle en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback in not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury Heated Seats If Equipped The heated seat switches are located in the instrument panel under the climate controls Heated Seat Switches 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEE Each heated seat switch has two settings HI and LOW Press the switch once to obtain High heat level then press the switch again to obtain Low heat level Pressing the switch a third time will turn the heated seats OFF If you do not purposefully turn the switch OFF the seat heating level will automatically change to the next lower level or OFF The High heat level operates for 30 minutes approximate the Low heat level operates for 30 min utes approximate The seat heat will also turn OFF when the ignition is turned OFF Both of the indicators ON identifies High heat level The lower indicator On only identifies Low heat level Flash
132. OBD II Vehicles equipped with California emissions controls have a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBDII This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be driveable and not need towing see your dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty 404 MAINTAIN
133. Play Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next file Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays the beginning of the file Pressing the button within the first ten seconds plays the previous file LOAD EJECT Button CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play LOAD EJT Load Press the LOAD EJT button and the push a button with the corresponding number where LOAD the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE The radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading LOAD EJT Eject Press the LOAD EJT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc LOAD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CD s in the radio the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout If the CD is removed and there are no other CD s in the radio the radio will remain in CD mode and display INSERT DISC for 2 minutes After 2 minutes the radio
134. RTING AND OPERATING 275 Starting Fluids WARNING WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may STARTING FLUIDS or flammable liquids are i a cause serious injury or death NEVER TO BE USED in the Cummins Diesel see Warning label Never pour diesel fuel flammable liquid starting fluids ether into the air cleaner NORMAL OPERATION DIESEL ENGINE canister air intake piping or turbocharger inlet in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a Observe the Tollovding when the engine ds operating m flash fire and explosion causing serious personal e All message center lights are off injury and engine damage e Check Engine Lamp is off e Engine Oil Pressure is above 10 psi 69 kPa at idle The engine is equipped with an automatic electric air MC preheating system If the instructions in this manual are e Low Oil Pressure light is off followed the engine should start in all conditions 276 STARTING AND OPERATING e Voltmeter Operation e The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation if certain engine temperatures are below 66 F 19 C This cycling operation is caused by the post heat cycle of the intake manifold heater system The number of cycles and the length of the cycling operation is controlled by the engine control mod ule Post heat operation can run for several minutes and then the electrical system and voltmeter needle will stab
135. Rotary Lumbar Support Adjustment If Power Seats If Equipped Equipped Rotating the lumbar control knob on the left side of the CAUTION Don t put anything under a power seat It may cause damage to the seat controls driver s seatback and on the right side of the passenger s seatback increases or decreases the lumbar lower back support Manual Lumbar Adjustment NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 control seat height Change the seat angle by using the two toggle switches tilting it up or down Up Down Forward and Rearward The power seat controls are on the outboard side of the front seat cushions Three switches control the seat move Tilt Adjustment ment The four way switch in the center can be moved forward or backwards to get the most comfortable posi tion The same switch can be moved up and down to 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEE Rear Seat Features Mega Cab Models Folding Rear Seat Table Mode Mega Cab Models Both the left and right rear seat backs can be folded down and used as a table Reclining Rear Seats Mega Cab Models The recliner handle is on the outside of the seat cushion Pull up on the handle as shown to release the seat back and adjust for comfort To fold either rear seat back down Table Mode lift the handle and fold the seat back forward Simply lift the seat back to return the seat to the uprigh
136. SC when the radio is reading the disc LOAD EJT Eject Press the LOAD EJT button and the push a button with the corresponding number where LOAD the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the LOAD EJT button for 5 seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CD s in the radio the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout If the CD is removed and there are no other CD s in the 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M radio the radio will remain in CD mode and display INSERT DISC for 2 minutes After 2 minutes the radio will go to the previous tuner mode The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF TIME Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner TUNE Control CD MODE for CD Audio Play Pr
137. Separator Filter 6 7L Diesel Engine sreg asnon ee She ee nna 415 Intervention Regeneration Strategy EVIC Message Process Flow Catalyst Full Message 6 7L Diesel Engines Only i e Maintenance Free Batteries Air Conditioner Maintenance 423 Power Steering Fluid Check 424 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx Front Suspension Ball Joints 425 Steering Linkage Inspection 425 Front Prop Shaft Lubrication 426 Front Axle Universal Drive Joints And Ball JOINS 3440468 RR RR REX Sees 426 Body Lubrication ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 426 Windshield Wiper Blades 427 Windshield Washers 000 427 Exhaust System saele sa parta paai pa e ee ee 428 Cooling System EE EE EE eee 429 Fan cia ER EE OR DE EK 434 Charge Air Cooler Inter Cooler 435 Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 435 Brake System iaces br Ra pe 436 Clatch Linkage is EE RE eee ESI RE ER 438 Clutch Hydraulic System 438 Rear Axle And 4X4 Front Driving Axle Fluid EE ER eren ia nw es mass 438 Transfer Case If Equipped 439 Manual Transmission If Equipped 439 Automatic Transmission 440 Front Wheel Bearings
138. T FULL SERVICE REQUIRED SERVICE AIR FILTER PERFORM SERVICE OIL CHANGE REQUIRED If Equipped Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNENEEEEEE seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Menu button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure PERFORM SERVICE Your vehicle will require emissions maintenance at a set interval To help remind you when this maintenance is due the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display
139. TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION ES INTRODUCTION 45553 ss nu Wise ie ie o s We s less Wise le o eos RS HR wi SIRO Rhen 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE see ese ees ese mmn 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE so se se esse esse esse ees sees Mm UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL esse esse ees sees sees sees see ese 5 STARTING AND OPERATING ccc cece cc wwe senescence t t esse es sees 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES se esse sesse esse esse esse hh sesse sesse hh ee 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE oos sees see esse esse esse esse sesse esse esse esse n MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ss sesse esse esse esse sesse ees se esse es see ees sees 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ss see ese esse esse esse sesse esse esse ee 10 INDEX 25 EE ER ER OIE ETE 8 EE R18 n INTRODUCTION CONTENTS E Introduction 0 0 0 0 0000 4 WVan Conversions Campers esses 7 ll A Message From DaimlerChrysler Corporation 4 Bi Vehicle Identification Number 8 Bl How To Use This Manuadl sss 5 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Bl Warnings And Cautions 0 0 7 4 INTRODUCTION EE INTRODUCTION This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and var
140. The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer Ask your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place 8163e6a8 Ignition Key Ignition Key Removal Automatic Transmission If Equipped Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the key OFF Ignition Switch Positions NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 NOTE If you try to remove the key before you place the lever in PARK the key may become trapped temporarily in the ignition cylinder If this occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the key as described If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service NOTE For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped and power outlets will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped and power out lets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
141. Towing 2 Wheel Drive Models Recreational towing of 2 Wheel Drive models is not allowed Towing with the rear wheels on the ground can result in severe transmission damage Recreational Towing 4 Wheel Drive Models CAUTION Failure to follow these requirements can cause severe damage to the transmission and or transfer case front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing NOTE Both the Manual Shift and Electronic Shift transfer cases must be shifted into Neutral N for recreational towing Automatic transmissions must be placed in P Park position for recreational towing Manual transmissions must be left in gear not in neutral for recreational towing Refer below for the proper trans fer case Neutral shifting procedure for your vehicle 370 STARTING AND OPERATING M Recreational Towing Procedure Manual Shift Transfer Case If Eguipped Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing CAUTION It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in N NEUTRAL before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 2 Shut OFF the engine 3 Depress the brake pedal 4 Shift automatic transmission to N NEUTRAL or depress the clutch on manual transmissions 5 Shift transfer case lever into N NEUTRAL 6 Start the engine 7 Shift automatic transmission into Reverse R
142. YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEE WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with defroster before and during wind shield washer use Windshield Washers To use the washer push in on the washer knob on the end of the multifunction control lever and hold while spray is desired If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range the wiper will operate for several seconds after the washer knob is released It will then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If the washer knob is pushed for a period greater than 1 second while in the OFF position the wiper will wipe approximately three wipes after the wash knob is released To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 TILT STEERING COLUMN To tilt the column pull rearward on the lever below the WARNING turn signal control and move the wheel up or down as desired Push the lever forward to lock the column firmly in place Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is moving is dangerous Without a stable steering col umn
143. a Full speed and load 30 psi 207 kPa CAUTION If oil pressure falls to less than normal readings shut the engine off immediately Failure to do so could result in immediate and severe engine damage NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 283 Do Not Operate The Engine With Failed Parts Practically all failures give some warning before the parts fail Be on the alert for changes in performance sounds and visual evidence that the engine requires service Some important clues are engine misfiring or vibrating severely sudden loss of power unusual engine noises fuel oil or coolant leaks sudden change outside the normal operating range in the engine operating temperature excessive smoke oil pressure drop DIESEL EXHAUST BRAKE ENGINE BRAKING IF EQUIPPED The exhaust brake feature will only function when the driver turns the exhaust brake switch to the on position Once the switch is in the on position and the vehicle is moving faster than 5 MPH the exhaust brake will automatically operate when the driver removes pressure from the accelerator pedal Exhaust braking is most effective when the engine RPM is higher The automatic transmission has been programmed to downshift more aggressively when the exhaust brake is enabled to in crease brake performance 284 STARTING AND OPERATING M Exhaust Brake Switch WARNING Do not use the Exhaust Brake feature when driving in icy or slippery conditions a
144. a slippery surface a slight application of the accelerator will supply maximum traction When starting with only one rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface slight momentary application of the parking brake may be necessary to gain maximum traction 306 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING On vehicles eguipped with a limited slip differen tial never run the engine with one rear wheel off the ground since the vehicle may drive through the rear wheel remaining on the ground You could lose control of the vehicle Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when both rear wheels are on a slippery surface This could cause both rear wheels to spin and allow the vehicle to slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a turn DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy 2 Slow down if road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the car in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Drivi
145. a bearing assembly is accidentally separated when servicing the brake rotors it should be replaced Rear Wheel Bearings Clean and repack when brake linings are replaced or rotors resurfaced Noise Control System Required Maintenance amp Warranty For 3500 Two Wheel Drive and Four Wheel Drive mod els over 10 000 Ibs 4 535 kg Gross Vehicle Weight Rating All vehicles built over 10 000 Ibs 4 535 kg Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and manufactured for sale and use in the United States are required to comply with the Federal Government s Exterior Noise Regulations These vehicles can be identified by the Noise Emission Control Label located in the operator s compartment Vehicle Moise Emission Control Information Date of Vehicle Manufacture This vehicle conforms to U S EPA regulations for noise emission applicable to medium and heavy duty trucks The following acts or the causing thereof by any person are prohibited by the Noise Control Act of 1972 A the removal or rendering inoperative other than for purposes of maintenance repair or replacement of any noise control device or element of design listed in the Owner s Manual incorporated into this vehicle in compliance with the Noise Control Act B the use of this vehicle after such device or element of design has been removed or rendered inoperative AX 55216044 444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Required Maintenance For Noise Control Systems The following maint
146. ad type tires mounted on the rear do not use a front to back rotation pattern Instead rotate your tires side to side at the recommended intervals STARTING AND OPERATING 335 Dual Rear Wheels FRONT The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in a set To check if tires are even lay a straight edge across all four tires The straight edge should touch all the tires 80f55fea 336 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION 3500 Dual Rear Tires have only one approved direc tion of rotation This is to accommodate the asym metrical design tread pattern of the ON OFF road tire and the use of Outline White Letter OWL tires e When replacing a flat the spare tire may have to be remounted on the rim or installed at a different location to maintain the correct placement of the tire on the wheel relative to the tire wheel position on the truck For example if the spare is used to replace an outer rear tire it will have to be re mounted on the rim so that the wheel is dished inward That way the tread design of asymmetrical tires and the white writing of the OWL tires will maintain proper position TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS IF EQUIPPED The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold tire inflation pressure placard the placard is located on the drivers side B pillar The t
147. adlight Switch Location NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Interior Lights 81482f6a Dimmer Control Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened when the dimmer control rotating wheel on the right side of the switch is rotated to the upward detent position or if equipped when the UN LOCK button is pressed on the key fob When a door is open and the interior lights are on rotating the dimmer control all the way down to the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to go out This is also known as the Party mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehi cle s battery The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control up brighter or down dimmer When the headlights are ON you can supplement the brightness of the odometer trip odom eter radio and overhead console by rotating the control up until you hear a click This feature is termed the Parade mode and is useful when headlights are re quired during the day Quad Cab models may have an optional switched dome lamp that may be operated by pressing the lens 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEE Battery Saver To protect the life of your vehicle s battery Load Shed ding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights If the ignition is off and any doo
148. after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable For details refer to KEY OFF POWER DELAY OFF under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 3 of this manual WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Manual Transmission If Equipped When the steering wheel is in the LOCK position the steering and ignition systems are locked to provide antitheft protection for your vehicle It may be difficult to turn the key from the LOCK position when starting your vehicle Move the steering wheel left and right while turning the key until it turns easily To remove the key depress and hold the release button located between the ignition switch and the instrument panel Turn the igni tion key to LOCK and remove the key Ignition Key Release Button Locking Doors With The K
149. ag Light The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer If there is a problem with the airbag light the seatbelt light will flash 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for tread wear or uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall cracks Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires for proper pressure Lights Check the operation of all exterior lights Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel water oil or other fluid leaks Also if fuel fumes are detected the cause should be located and corrected UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS MES EA oie ne Gin ee RR eae a 84 Hi Hands Free Communication UConnect Inside Misror 4 cud ee gh ae ae cd 84 TP EQMPPS epea pie eua E P Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equi
150. ain on for 15 seconds as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 23 SERV 4WD Indicator The 4WD indicator will be illuminated whenever the 4WD mode is engaged for either the manual or electric shift 4WD systems The SERV 4WD indicator monitors the electric shift 4WD system If the SERV 4WD light stays on or comes on during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required 24 Water In Fuel Indicator Indicates there is water detected in the fuel 4 filter Refer to the Maintenance section Drain ing Fuel Water Separator Filter for water drain procedure 25 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped Each tire including the spare if provided 1 should be checked monthly when cold and d inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly under inflated Ac cordingly when the l
151. ain free from any obstructions If your vehicle is equipped with window bags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for in stallation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason NOTE Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat hooks in this vehicle A clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the window bags Along with the seat belts front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Window bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions If your vehicle is so equipped the window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions But even in collisions where the airbags work you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 Here are some simple steps you can follow to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint Infants in rear facing child restraints sho
152. ake pedal to pull the selector lever out of park P position Brake Interlock System To drive move the selector lever from Park or Neutral to the desired drive position Pull the selector lever toward you when shifting into Reverse or Park or when shifting out of Park Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from Park or Neutral position into another gear range 286 STARTING AND OPERATING M P Park 1 This gear position supplements the parking brake by WARNINGI locking the transmission The engine can be started in Tt is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P or this range Never use Park while the vehicle is in motion N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle range Always apply parking brake first then place the could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You selector in Park position On 4 wheel drive vehicles be could lose control of the vehicle and Wit someone or sure that the transfer case is in a drive position something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal WARNING Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in P Park Check by trying to R Reverse move the gearshift lever back and forth without first Use this range only after the vehicle has c
153. aking capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 313 This Anti lock Brake System is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system operates with a separate com puter to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces The system s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to provide regulated hydraulic pressure The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation This is normal When you are in a severe braking condition involving use of the Anti lock Brake System you will experience some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a complete stop This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake system and is normal Engagement of the Anti lock Brake System may be accompanied by a pulsing sensation You may also hear a clicking noise These occurrences are normal and indi cate that the system is functioning ABS Warning Light The Anti lock Brake System in
154. also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the fall and spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427 Windshield Wiper Blades The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accu mulations of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc Windshield Washers The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not ra diator antifreeze When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield w
155. and 74 and for snowy or very cold weather requiring extra heat to the windshield use 3j EXTREME COLD CONDITIONS DIESEL pM Using re circulated air can aid initial warm up in extreme cold conditions NOTICE Running in lt amp gt MAX for long periods of time will result in window fogging When this occurs use J until windows clear This will deactivate lt amp gt MAX SINGLE ZONE VEHICLES Set the mode control at lt H lt MAX close the panel vents and set the temperature control to full hot Turn blower control nob to low and gradually increase as air and engine temperature increase DUAL ZONE VEHICLES Set the mode control at J set both temperature controls to full hot and press the amp amp MAX button Turn blower control knob to low and gradually increase as air and engine temperature increase WINDOW FOGGING In most cases turning on the Air Conditioning press the 4X button will clear the fog then adjust temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As it gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield If so set the Mode control at 4j or BY and adjust temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging B159dfbc STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS ll Starting Procedures Diesel Engines 269 Cold Weather Precautions 276 Ma
156. and driveability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler group vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance pro cedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips 496 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Se Call Toll Free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the World Wide Web at e www techauthority daimlerchrysler com e www daimlerchrysler ca manuals DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following describes the tire grading categories estab lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis tration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your car All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements in Addition to These Grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con ditions on a specified government test course For ex ample a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly
157. ar Window Switch 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEE FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR IF EQUIPPED Quad Cab models with a 60 40 rear seat may be WARNING equipped with a folding load floor Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on the load floor While driving or in an accident you may experience abrupt stopping rapid acceleration or sharp turns Loose objects stored on the load floor may move around with force and strike occupants resulting in serious or fatal injury Quad Cab Rear 60 40 Seat en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 Unfolding the Load Floor 2 Grasp the knob on the load floor and lift the knob until 1 Lift the 60 40 seat cushion s to the upward position the load floor unfolds Ho posiuon u Unfolding The Load Floor Load Floor In Open Position 3 Reverse the procedure to store the load floor 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEE Positioning the Load Floor for Storage Access Under the Seat 1 Lift the 60 40 seat cushion s to the upward position 2 Unsnap the securing snap located at either side of the load floor 3 Lift the load floor up to access storage under the load floor WARNING Do not drive with the load floor in the up position When stopping fast or in an accident the load floor could move to the down position causing serious injury Load Floor Securing Strap
158. areful adherence to them will ensure that you take full advantage of the features of this engine Thank you for choosing the Dodge Ram truck with Cummins Turbo Diesel power HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the table of contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed index at the rear of this manual contains a complete listing of all subjects EN Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this owner s manual 6 INTRODUCTION A RJ S D eo 9 WY amp amp Sm E ELECTRONIC STABILITY WATER IN FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD WIPER EXTERIORBULB HIGHBEAM TURN SIGNALS UPPER AIR HEATED SEAT DOORLOCK ADJUSTABLE ELECTRONIC PROGRAM BRAKE ENGINE COOLANT WIPER INTERMITTENT FAILURE OUTLET PEDALS SPEED CONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM TEMPERATURE BRAKE Z l R SRS n NJ v e o D s BRAKE SYSTEM FUEL REAR WINDOW WMNOSHIELO MASTER LIGHTING LOW BEAM KEYACTIVATE UPPER AND LOWER HEATED SEAT WINDOWLIFT TIRE PRESSURE HILL DESCENT WARNING PARKING SUPPLEMENTAL INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER SWITCH POWER OUTLET AIR OUTLET HIGH MONITOR CONTROL BRAKE RESTRAINT SYSTEM M eS z H Rs d x AWD B i 4 D dam f 2 FUELFILL SIDE REARWNDOW WINDSHIELD WASHER DOMELIGNT FRONTFOGLIGHT HOOD RELEASE LOWERAIR RECIRCULATION CONVERTIBLE TRACTION ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTI LOCK PASSENGER WASHER FLUID LEVEL OUTLET 4 WINDOW DOWN CONTROL DRIVE BRAKING SYST
159. artment Push down on the front of the storage compartment handle and lift the storage compartment cover Mega Cab Rear Storage Dividers Mega Cab Rear Storage Compartment Handle 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers Mega Cab Models Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag handles are built into the back panel of the cab behind the rear seat Grocery Bag Hooks REAR WINDOW FEATURES Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated Side view Mirrors If Equipped The Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated side view mirrors are activated by pressing the heated grid button located on the Climate Control panel with the ignition On Turning Off the ignition will deactivate the Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated side view mirrors feature These features also turn off after activation when 15 minutes have elapsed For ten more minutes of operation push the button again NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 Power Sliding Rear Window If Eduipped The power sliding rear window switch is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls Press the right side of the switch to open the glass and the left side of the switch to close the glass Sliding Rear Window If Eguipped EET A locking device in the center of the window helps to prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle Sgueeze the lock to release the window Power Sliding Re
160. asher system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution 428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M After the engine has warmed operate the defroster for a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the cold windshield Mopar All Weather Windshield Washer Solution used with water as directed on the container aids cleaning action reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging and is not harmful to paint or trim Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING
161. ass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL message does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press the menu button until Personal Settings is displayed 3 Press the STEP button until Calibrate Compass YES is displayed 4 Press and release the RESET button to start the calibration The message CAL will display in the EVIC 5 Slowly drive the vehicle 5 mph in a complete 360 circle in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message turns off The compass will now function normally en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings If this occurs the compass variance must be set using the following procedure NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the overhead console This is where the compass sensor is located 817ba7f0 Compass Variance Map 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEE 1 Tum the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press the menu button until Personal Settings is displayed 3 Press the STEP button until Co
162. atic Transaxle 00 0000 Se 12 Interlock System ey tace der dr dena 19 Automatic Transmission sss 440 Adding Fluid isse REEDE Ke ERR 440 Fluid and Filter Changes satas 442 Fluid Level Check 0 000000 eee 440 Fluid Type 22 2249 R9 ry RR 441 473 Shift Indicator leen 192 Shif ng fay i va aes esu eae qe rs 285 NEE INDEX 501 Special Additives 2 sies ss EER EE Ep ER Ee 442 Autostick eene none PWR a eX ar ec ae Dle 192 Axle Fluid 222463 RR DRESS eA 439 473 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 439 Ball Joints usce ete RT Re t a ends 425 Battery xxu MEE RE RD REM RE RE be E Pers 422 Blanket 4 240255 eh RR RET A ERE 278 423 Emergency Starting llle 391 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 25 Saving Feature Protection 132 beatis uoo use deu b ew Ede RUE s 443 Belts Drive 2 o2 354 4 248 KOR 64 9 ei nS SS 412 Belts Seal ue oed wae RE dos dE RP dr UR EE 35 Body Builders Guide pesses scere 7 Body Mechanism Lubrication 426 B Pillar Location EE EE Es ee se 319 Brake Fluid s sre Sole ER ME SE R a Fe 473 Brake System ee 6 eee eee 311 436 Anti Lock ABS 0 0 00 e iess erii 312 Disc Brakes xeu cia meter eae 436 Fluid Check Reb R ee ees a 436 n Pcr 438 Master Cylinder osse ee EE EE Ee ee 436 Parking ie nein mme Kha da ERR AN aes 309 Warning Light eese 194 Bulb Replacem
163. ave Equipped been turned off before leaving the vehicle 81b709bb 818t5ab5 Overhead Console with EVIC D Reading Light Mal i ecl E Pressing the menu button will change the display to one of the following features 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEE Trip Functions Pressing the STEP button allows you to scroll through one of the following Trip Function features TRIP Shows the total distance traveled since the last reset To reset the TRIP function press and hold the RESET button ELAPSED TIME Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or START positions UNIT IN US METRIC Press the RESET button to toggle between US and METRIC AVG MPG Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset Example If your Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC displays 18 AVG MPG and the RESET button is pressed the previous averaging his tory will be erased and the display will return to the 18 AVG MPG not to 0 AVG MPG The display may take several miles for the value to change dependent upon driving habits e MI TO EMPTY Distance To Empty Shows the estimated distance that
164. beginning of the current selection or to the beginning of the previous selection if it is within the first 5 seconds of the current selection If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second selection three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch has no function in this mode CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch has no function in this mode 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition take the following precautions 1 Do not use cassette tapes longer than C 90 otherwise sound quality and tape durability will be greatly dimin ished 2 Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from slackness and dust when it is not in use 3 Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight heat and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers 4 Before inserting a tape make sure that the label is adhering flatly to the cassette 5 A loose tape should be corrected before use To rewind a
165. bined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capaci ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle NOTE For the following example the combined weight m of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 kg 322 STARTING AND OPERATING M Occupants TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 Combined weight of occupants and cargo MINUS from Tire Placard weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib Combined Occupant s AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs Occupant 1 210 lbs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs Occupant 1 200 los TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 323 WARNING sche io WARNING Overloading of your tires i
166. brake fully applied The parking brake should al ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline Truck models with manual transmission are equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system The clutch pedal must be fully depressed to start the vehicle Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly depress the accelera tor pedal This transmission has a creeper 1st gear which should be used to start from a standing position when carrying a payload or towing a trailer Damage to the clutch can result from starting in 2nd or 3rd gear with a loaded vehicle An unloaded vehicle may be launched in 2nd gear Use each gear in numerical order do not skip a gear For most city driving you may find it easier to use only 1st through 5th gear ranges For steady highway driving with light accelerations 6th gear is recommended To shift into 5th gear move the shift lever to the right beyond the spring pressure point and push it forward When shifting from 5th to 4th gear pull the lever down toward you in one motion Do not pull the lever sharply left as you may shift accidentally into 2nd gear and damage the transmission You should use 1st gear when starting from a standing position if under heavy load or when pulling a trailer NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 293 To shift into Reverse come to a complete stop Depress the clutch and pause briefly to a
167. bs Cargo Lamps 7 e Inside Bulb Center High Mount Stop Lamp 3 Turn desired bulb socket turn and remove socket and bulb from housing 5 Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and hous ing 466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Mm Cab Top Clearance Lights If Eduipped 2 Rotate the socket 1 4 turn and pull it from the light 1 Remove the two screws from the top of the light assembly B ecdc9b NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467 3 Pull the bulb straight from it s socket and replace Tailgate ID Lights Dual Rear Wheels If Equipped 1 Remove the two screws and housing and access the bulb sockets from the rear 468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Turn socket turn counterclockwise to access the bulb 3 Pull bulb straight out from socket 4 Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and hous ing NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469 Rear Light Bar ID Marker Dual Rear Wheel If 3 Pull the bulb straight out from the socket Equipped 4 Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and hous 1 Loosen the two screws and the housing to gain access ing to the bulb sockets Side Marker Lights Dual Rear Wheels 80f86087 2 Turn the socket 1 4 turn counterclockwise to access the bulb 1 Push rearward on the side marker light assembly 2 Pull the entire assembly from the fender 470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Turn socket turn counterclockwise and remove from FLUID CAPACITI
168. ce Recognition button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect sys tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cell phone the UConnect system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dialing via the cell phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect system will work the same as
169. ch speed and press the snowflake button located on the front seat occupant can independently control the tem control panel Conditioned air will be directed through perature of air coming from the outlets on their side of the outlets selected by the mode control A light in the the vehidle snowflake button shows that the air conditioning is on Press the button a second time to turn the air condition ing off A C Pushbutton With the fan control in the ON posi tion pushing the A C button turns on the air conditioning compressor An indicator light on the button shows that the Air Conditioning compressor sodobdgs 15 On Conditioned air is now directed 81646387 through the mode outlets selected Dual Zone Control Head Pushing the button a second time turns the compressor OFF NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 Recirculation Pushbutton Pushing the Recirculation button al lows interior air to recirculate continu ously in any position except defrost and defrost floor mode for rapid cool down of the interior See Fast Cooldown later in this section 811b86fe Mode Control The mode control allows you to choose from several patterns of air distribution 816463c5 NOTE To improve your selection choices the system allows you to operate at intermediate positions between the major modes These intermediate positions are iden tified by the small dots and give an even blend of both modes Panel
170. ck with the fluid at approximately 70 F 21 C room tem perature If the fluid level is correctly established at room temperature it should be between the HOT upper reference holes when the transmission reaches 180 F 82 C Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature CAUTION Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading 7 Check for leaks Release parking brake To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube Selection Of Lubricant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the correct lubricant type It is important that the transmis sion fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid 442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turers recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift guality and or torgue converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid will result in more freguent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Gen
171. ck by another hour 4 To increase the clock by minutes make sure MIN is highlighted and press ENTER Press ENTER again to increase the clock by another minute 5 To decrease the clock by minutes use the Select Encoder to highlight the sign Press ENTER Press ENTER again to decrease the clock by another minute 6 Select DONE to exit from the clock setting mode Press ENTER to save your changes If you press CAN CEL or NAV then your changes will not be saved NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 Audio Clock Display Select this option to change the size of the clock on the audio screens 1 When you are at an audio screen guickly press the TIME button on the navigation faceplate 2 In this example the large clock appears on the screen 123456 LE 81920925 3 To switch the clock to the small clock quickly press TIME again 123456 819a09ac 4 To toggle back to the large clock simply press TIME 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM SALES CODE XRV IF EQUIPPED The optional VES Video Entertainment System con sists of a DVD player and LCD liquid crystal display screen a battery powered remote control and two head sets The system is located in the headliner behind the front row seat Refer to your VES User s Manual for detailed operating instructions SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED Satellite radio uses direct satel
172. cludes an amber warning light located in the instrument cluster When the light is illuminated the Anti lock Brake System is not function ing The system reverts to standard non anti lock brakes WARNING Pumping of the anti lock brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop 314 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and does not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short period of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and does not in any way damage the steering system assist could pose a safety risk
173. components e Receiver Module e 4 Wheel Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings 1X The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will d illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update 340 STARTING AND OPERATING Sx and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 kph to receive this information Check TPMS Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and will remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists A system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that affects ra dio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housin
174. d Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your radio PTY Button SCAN When the desired program type is obtained press the SCAN button within five seconds The radio will play 7 seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next channel of the selected program type Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search NOTE Pressing the SEEK or SCAN button while performing a music type scan will change the channel by one and stop the search Pressing a pre set memory button during a music type scan will call up the memory channel and stop the search PTY Button SEEK When the desired program is obtained press the SEEK button within five seconds The channel will change to the next channel that matches the program type selected Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception on vehicles available with a luggage rack do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased perfor mance Larger luggage items should be placed as far forward as possible Do not place items directly on or above the antenna 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception e Driving under wide b
175. d Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading sec tion of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWR s for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWER s vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to the Vehicle Loading section of this manual To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 321 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 5 Determine the com
176. d UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 Bl Rear Window Features SS 174 B Pickup Box ee EE EE iuni ransa cwi 179 Electric Rear Window Defroster And Heated H Slide In Campers 0000000 180 Side View Mirrors If Equipped sis vos 174 Camper Applications o an aaa aaa aaa 180 Power Sliding Rear Window If Equipped 175 Sliding Rear Window If Equipped 175 ll Fold Flat Load Floor If Equipped 176 lll Easy Off Tailgate 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEE MIRRORS Inside Mirror The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward windshield Adjusting Rear View Mirror en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light in the button will indicate when the dimming feature is activated R Automatic Dimming Mirror 81789204 CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto t
177. d time EJECT Button CD Mode Press this button and the disc will unload and AA move to the entrance for easy removal The unit will switch to the last selected mode If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds it will be reloaded The radio mode will continue to appear TIME Button CD Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD playing time to time of day The time of day will display for 5 seconds RW FF CD Mode Press and hold the FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner RND SET Button Random Play Button CD Mode Press this button while the CD is playing to activate A Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the tracks Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature If the RW button is pressed the current track will reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle
178. da If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 NEE F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 495 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals No P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive service manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations dia grams and charts e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations these practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting
179. de Press the MSG or INFO button for an RBDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE Time Button Press the time button and the time of day will be displayed for 5 seconds Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the time button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Audio control 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side Tune Audio control to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Audio control 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the rewind fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satel lite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency AM FM Button Radio Mode Press the button to select AM or FM Modes Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or
180. de If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s mm Manual Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE SALES CODE REC AM FM CD 6 DISC RADIO WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM 04b4 Satellite Navigation Radio with CD Player with MP3 Capability REC combines a CGlobal Positioning System based navigation system with an integrated color screen to provide maps turn identification selection menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destina tions and routes AM FM stereo radio and six disc CD changer with MP3 capability Mapping information for navigation is supplied on a DVD that is loaded into the unit One map DVD covers all of North America Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions REC Setting the Clock GPS Clock The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites The satellites clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 the worldwide standard for time This makes the sys tem s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight
181. de of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards You need proper knee impact protection in a collision Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNENENEEEEEEEEEEEEEE NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may ap ply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Enhanced Accident Response System If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical system remains functional vehicles eguipped with power door locks will unlock automatically In addition approximately 5 seconds after the vehicle has stopped moving the interior lights will light until the ignition switch is turned off Airbag Light You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your protection in an impact While MN ihe airbag system is designed to be mainte nance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system promptly e The airbag light does not come on or flickers during the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on e The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second interval e The light flickers or comes on and remains on while dri
182. deo MP3 And WMA Capabilities 224 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 224 Operating Instructions Tape Player 228 Seek Button sace Ra 228 Fast Forward AFE oseere sr ee ee es see 229 Rewind RW 42 va 6 264 ave dead eie 229 Tape Eject is bie Ee 3 nhe HR Raab 229 Scan Dutton 2er ex EXPO bale aes 229 Changing Tape Direction 229 Metal Tape Selection ee EE ee ee 229 Pinch Roller Release sennen cassia 229 NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 Noise Reduction EE EE reds 230 Audio Clock Display 0 0 241 Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD lll Video Entertainment System Sales Code XRV Audio Play sass EER sobre psc eer RE Rd 230 It BQuipped s x edes estera hoe err ga 242 Load Eject Button CD Mode For CD Audio H Satellite Radio If Equipped 242 uu MR RE e System Activation esseere kenra enga 242 Notes Dn Paying HE e Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification um Operation Instructions CD Mode For MP3 Number ESN SID isle eee 243 And WMA Audio Play ee ee se ee 235 Selecting Satellite Mode In REF RAQ And Load Eject Button CD Mode For MP3 And RAK Radios 6 0 0 0 0 eee 244 WNT AT modos read Mis Selecting a Channel EE EE EE Ee 244 ll Sales Code REC AM FM CD 6 Disc Radio With Navigation System
183. do not adequately filter the air entering the engine Use of such filters can severely damage your engine 818e32b1 CAUTION Do not drain the fuel water separator filter when the engine is running 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a new fuel filter There is a possibility debris could be introduced into the fuel filter during this action It is best to install the filter dry and allow the in tank lift pump to prime the fuel system NOTE The fuel filter and water separator assembly is located on the driver s side of the engine The best access to the water drain valve is through the driver s side wheel well NOTE If water is detected in the water separator while the engine is running or while the key is in the on position the water in fuel light will illuminate and an audible chime will be heard 5 times At this point you should stop the engine and drain the water from the separator If the water in fuel light comes on and a single chime is heard while you are driving or with the key in the ON position there may be a problem with your water separator wiring or sensor See your authorized dealer for service Upon proper draining of the water from the fuel filter the water in fuel light will remain illuminated for approxi mately 10 seconds If the water was drained while the engine was running the water in fuel light may remain on for approximately 3 minut
184. do not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts Hub Caps Wheel Covers The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle off the ground For 2500 3500 single rear wheel SRW models use the blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry the hub cap off Insert the blade end into the pryoff notch and carefully pop off the hub cap with a back and forth motion On 3500 models with dual rear wheels DRW you must first remove the hub caps The jack handle driver has a hook at one end that will fit in the pry off notch of the rear hub caps Position the hook and pull out on the NEE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 387 ratchet firmly The hub cap should pop off The wheel skins can now be removed For the front hub cap on 3500 models use the blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry the caps off The wheel skin can now be removed CAUTION Use a back and forth motion to remove the hub cap Do not use a twisting motion when removing the hub cap damage to the hub cap finish may occur CAUTION The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has two pry off notches Make sure that the hook of the jack handle driver is located sguarely in the cap notch before attempting to pull off You must use the flat end of the lug wrench to pry off the wheel skins Insert the flat tip completely and using a back and forth motion loosen the wheel skin Repeat this procedure around the tire until the skin pops off Replace the wheel skins first using a
185. dures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses Daytime Running Lights Canada Only and Fleet Vehicles The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the engine is started and the transmission is in any gear except park This provides a constant Lights ON con dition until the ignition is turned OFF The lights illumi nate at less than 50 of normal intensity If the parking brake is applied the Daytime Running Lights will turn off Also if a turn signal is activated the DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation Once the turn signal is no longer active the DRL lamp will illuminate 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEE Lights on Reminder If the headlights parking lights or cargo lights are left on after the ignition is turned off a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped O The foglights are turned ON by placing the head light rotary control in the parking light or head light position and pushing in the headlight rotary control The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are ON or when the
186. e interval for vehicles registered in California Maine Massachusetts New York and Vermont M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS H Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Vehicle i a eeri r rran Ped 490 Prepare For The Appointment 490 Prepare A EiSt ou cremer tw vas oe n de 490 Be Reasonable With Requests 490 B If You Need Assistance ee 490 Bl Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 493 ll Mopar Parts Bl Reporting Safety Defects esse es se ee 494 In Canada wes edrat ebur Be BEER 494 Bl Publication Order Forms 0 495 lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Quality Grades Tread Wear sese miit art AE SE ALLE RS Traction Grades Temperature Grades 490 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Se SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had
187. e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel For tough stains apply Mopar Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply Mopar Multi purpose cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen tials products Interior Care Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery 450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Glass Surfaces All glass surfac
188. e Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR e For best performance adjust the rear view mirror to provide at least 2 inch 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting approximately eight 8 feet away from you e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period e Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in phone book when vehicle is not in motion is recommended en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1
189. e and loss of vehicle control Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use on your vehicle This tire is identified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly This tire may look like the 328 STARTING AND OPERATING M original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same tire replace or repair the original tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 60 mph 100 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Fa
190. e cs E Rb cate 44 Programmable Electronic Features 149 Radial Ply Tires kenne nme dg 326 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 432 Radio Broadcast Signals 200 Radio Navigation llle 238 Radio Operation ese ee ee ee ee 202 210 224 Radio Remote Controls SS SS Se 246 Radio Satellite 0 0 00 eee eee 238 242 Radio Sound Systems 202 210 224 Rear Axle Differential 438 439 Rear Seat Folding 0000 122 124 Rear Wheel Bearings 0000005 443 Rear Window Features 00 0000s 174 Rear Window Sliding 04 33 175 Reclining Front Seats sas ratis ad Da eA 118 Reclining Rear Seats qetsi mtesse di hemes 122 Recorder Event Data 0 0 0 0 cee 59 Recreational Towing 0 0000000 369 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 370 372 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 371 374 Refrigerant Reminder Seat Belt 512 INDEX ME Remote Keyless Entry RKE 21 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 246 Replacement Keys EE Ee EE ee eens 16 Replacement Tires EE i madah i 330 Reporting Safety Defects 00 494 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 147 149 Resetting Perform Service Indicator 148 479 Restraint Head adis eee 119 Restraints Child scssi esere ers 00000 ee 61 68 Re
191. e information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and that they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions except the Quad Cab front center seating position have combination lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of your strikin
192. e is not re Models quired Brake Master Cylinder Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recom mended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS ll Emission Control System Maintenance 476 Perform Service Indicator Bl Maintenance Schedules 6 7L Turbo Diesel 477 Maintenance Schedule sss Oil Change Indicator System 478 Qo comr com zroo mozp zm Az z M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 476 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Sx EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled maintenance services listed in bold type in this section Section 8 must be done at the times or mileages specified to assure the continued proper functioning of the emission control system These and all other maintenance services included in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service also should be done any time a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any aut
193. e on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Because 4 wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit 302 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the Neutral N position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case Neutral N position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2WD Rear Wheel Drive High Range Normal street and highway driving Dry hard surfaced roads 4WD LOCK 4 Wheel Drive High Range Locks the front and rear driveshafts together Forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only 4WD LOW 4 Wheel Drive Low Range Low speed 4 wheel drive Locks the front and rear driveshafts together Forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h N Neutral Disengages both t
194. e shutting it down This idle period will allow the lubricating oil and coolant to carry excess heat away from the combustion chamber bearings internal components and turbocharger This is especially important for turbo charged charge air cooled engines NOTE During engine shutdown on vehicles equipped with manual transmissions it is normal for the diesel engine to resonate heavily for a moment during engine shut off When the engine is connected to a manual transmission this resonance causes load gear rattle from the transmission This is commonly referred to as shut down rattle The manufacturer recommends performing engine shut down with the clutch pedal pushed to the floor clutch disengaged When engine shut down is performed in this manner the rattle is reduced not eliminated NEE ed STARTING AND OPERATING 281 Turbo Idle Time Driving Load char min Be Condition BET fore Engine Temperature 5 Shutdown Stop and Empty Cool Less than Go One Stop and Medium One Go Highway Medium Warm Two Speeds City Traffic Maximum Three GCWR Highway Maximum Four Speeds GCWR Uphill Maximum Hot Five Grade GCWR Engine Speed Control CAUTION Prevent overspeeding the engine going down hill When descending steep grades use a combination of gears and service brakes to control vehicle engine speed Overspeed can cause severe engine damage Operating Precautions Avoid Overheati
195. e to monitor the amount of particulate matter trapped in the particulate filter This message indicates the percentage of the particulate filter capacity that has been used By simply driving your vehicle at highway speeds for as little as 45 minutes you can remedy the condition in the particulate filter system and allow your Cummins engine and exhaust Aftertreatment system to remove the trapped PM and restore the system to normal operating condition Catalyst Stat 80 90 99 Catalyst Stat 80 90 99 If you are unable to drive your vehicle under these conditions for an ex tended period of time after the initial warning notifica tion the Engine PCM will continue to monitor the particulate filter and will display the progression of particulate filter usage 80 90 99 on the EVIC message center CATALYST FULL SERVICE REQD If the particulate filter reaches 99 of it s capacity the overhead console in your vehicle will chime twice and display the message CATALYST FULL SERVICE REQD At this point the engine PCM will register a fault code the instrument panel will display a MIL light and the engine PCM will derate the truck reducing its horse power and torque output 422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M The PCM derates the engine in order to limit the likeli hood of permanent damage to the aftertreatment system If this condition is not corrected and a dealer service is not performed extensive exhaust aftertrea
196. eater than those listed in the Maximum Recommended Downshifting Speed chart Maximum Recommended Downshifting Speeds Gear Selec 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th tion Maxi 10 mph 19 mph 32 mph 50 mph 68 mph mum 16 31 51 80 109 Speed km h km h km h km h km h FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION IF EQUIPPED Four Wheel Drive Dodge Ram Trucks are equipped with either a Manually Shifted transfer case or an Electroni cally Shifted transfer case See the operating instructions for your transfer case located within this section Manually Shifted Transfer Case Operating Information Precautions The transfer case provides 4 mode positions 2 rear wheel drive high range 4 wheel drive high range neu tral and 4 wheel drive low range This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2 wheel drive position 2H for normal street and highway con ditions such as dry hard surfaced roads When additional traction is required the transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 295 simply moving the shift lever to the desired positions The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline comp
197. ecure location This number is required for dealer replacement of keys Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Pro gramming procedure This procedure consists of pro gramming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one which has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to the dealer NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Customer Key Programming If you have two valid sentry keys you can program new sentry keys to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least 3 seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After ten seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Inserta blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In
198. eding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High Flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 316 STARTING AND OPERATING M Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary Spare tire 31 Overall Diameter in Inches in 215 Section Width in Millimeters mm 65 Aspect Ratio in Percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section Width in Inches in R Construction Code R means Radial Construction D means Diagonal or Bias Construction 15 Rim Diameter in Inches in NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 317 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un der specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on sidewall of the ti
199. ellow disc will always show the greatest restriction experienced by the filter element When the disc reaches the red zone the filter element may need to be replaced There is no other time or mileage interval for changing the air cleaner filter element If the vehicle experiences a sudden loss of engine power when being driven in heavy snow or rain or when plowing snow check the Filter Minder e If the Filter Minder is showing a plugged filter the filter should be visually inspected for snow ice build up or extreme water saturation e If the filter is not damaged remove all snow ice reinstall filter and reset the Filter Minder A visual inspection of the air cleaner filter element is never recommended under normal circumstances A badly restricted element may appear clean while a soiled element may be quite effective in filtering particles without restricting air flow Rely on the Filter Minder to determine when a filter change is necessary After a new filter element is inserted press the rubber button on the top of the Filter Minder This action will reset the yellow disc to the clean position NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415 CAUTION Draining Fuel Water Separator Filter 6 7L Diesel Engine When using an engine cleaner or a degreaser be sure to wrap and tape the Filter Minder to protect the plastic housing from damage and discoloration CAUTION Many aftermarket performance air filter elements
200. eme left blue region and the warmest setting is to the extreme right red region of the rotation Air Conditioning and Heating If Equipped 81646393 Air Conditioning And Heating Air Conditioning Operation To turn on the Air Conditioning set the fan control at any speed and press the snowflake button located at the right of the control panel Conditioned air will be directed through the NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 outlets selected by the mode control A light in the snowflake button shows that the air conditioning is on Press the button a second time to turn the air condition ing off Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed when the air conditioning compressor is on This is a normal occurrence as the compressor will cycle on and off to maintain comfort and increase fuel economy The mode control at the right of the control panel can be set in any of the following positions He 816463c5 NOTE To improve your selection choices the system allows you to operate at intermediate positions between the major modes These intermediate positions are iden tified by the small dots Recirculation Modes Panel or Bi Level e Select the recirculation modes when the outside air contains smoke odors high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired This feature allows for recir culation of interior air only Air flows through the panel only or through both the panel and flo
201. en ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P Park or N Neutral position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears RKE UNLOCK DRV DR 1st When DRV DR 1st is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press of the remote keyless entry unlock button twice to unlock the passenger s doors To make your selection press and release the RESET button until DRV DR 1st appears 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEE RKE UNLOCK ALL DR 1ST When All ALL DR 1ST is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button To make your selection press and release the RESET button until All DR 1st appears SOUND HORN W LOCK YES When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the remote keyless entry Lock button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock unlock feature To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears FLASH LIGHTS w LOCK YES When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitt
202. enance services must be performed every 6 months or 6 000 miles 9 600 km whichever comes first to assure proper operation of the noise control systems In addition inspection and service should be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected Proper maintenance of the entire vehicle will help the effectiveness of the noise control systems Exhaust System Inspect the entire exhaust system for leaks and damaged parts Devices such as hangers clamps and U bolts should be tight and in good condition Damaged compo nents burned or blown out mufflers burned or rusted out exhaust pipes should be replaced according to the procedures and specifications outlined in the appropriate service manual Air Cleaner Assembly Inspect air cleaner housing for proper assembly and fit Make certain that the air cleaner is properly positioned and that the cover is tight Check all hoses leading to the air cleaner for tightness The air filter element must also be clean and serviced according to the instructions out lined in the Maintenance Schedule Section of this manual Tampering With Noise Control System Prohibited Federal law prohibits the following acts or the causing thereof 1 the removal or rendering inoperative by any person other than for purposes of maintenance repair or replacement of any device or element of design incorpo rated into any new vehicle for the purpose of noise control prior to its sale or delivery to the ul
203. engine oils that are API CJ 4 certified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Use Mopar or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 10902 Products meeting Cummins CES 20081 may also be used The identification of these engine oils are typically lo cated on the back of the oil container American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petro leum Institute API The manufacture only recommends API Certified en gine oils 818dc76e en MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 Oils with a high ash content may produce deposits on valves that can progress to guttering and valve burning A maximum sulfated ash content of 1 00 mass is recommended for all oil used in the engine The same oil change interval is to be followed for synthetic oil as for petroleum based oil Also synthetic oil must meet the same performance specifications as petro leum oil Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade Use SAE 15W 40 Engine Oil that meets DaimlerChrysler Materials Standard MS 10902 and the API CJ 4 engine oil category Engine oil not designated by the DaimlerChrysler or Cummins Material Standards and API CJ 4 should not be used engine and exhaust system durability may be compromised For lower temperature operation SAE 5W 40 engine oils may be used These oils must meet the same requirements as stated previously Your engine oil filler cap also shows the
204. engine start ing and operating Wait until the Wait To Start Indicator turns OFF then start the vehicle NOTE The Wait To Start Indicator may not illuminate if the engine coolant temperature is warm enough NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 28 Odometer Trip Odometer Button Press this button to toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer display Holding the button in resets the trip odometer reading when in trip mode 29 Fuel Gauge Shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the ON position 30 Low Fuel Warning Light Glows when the pointer is between E and 1 8 indication mark approximately 15 of tank vol ume on the fuel gauge When the fuel gauge pointer is on E equivalent to Distance To Empty DTE 0 on the overhead console if so equipped there is reserve fuel capacity which corresponds to approxi mately 8 of tank volume This reserve capacity was put in place to prevent the likelihood of customers running out of fuel when operating at maximum load conditions in areas where there aren t many gas stations Ram fuel tank volumes are as follows e 34 gallons 2500 3500 short box models e 35 gallons 2500 3500 long box models 31 CRUISE Light This indicator lights when the electronic speed control system is turned on ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK The clock and radio each use the display panel built into the radio A digital readout shows the frequency and or time in hours
205. ent 0000000 457 Bulbs Light rassi cvs EER RR y RR eee as 457 Cab Top Clearance Lights 4 466 Calibration Compass festre es 152 Camper se ee dore ego pe PE Ree i d 180 Capacities Antifreeze Engine Coolant 470 Capacities Fluid uu es ae Ee ME eh Oe s 470 Caps Filler Oil Engine ecse ore 9 abetted RE BEDE l ower Steermbs ss RE od wah anri wk aes Radiator Coolant Pressure 502 INDEX ME Car Washes cium sad ee EE EA EE Died he x 447 Carbon Monoxide Warning 76 182 Cargo Wight isa BE RA ruere sci GED ail ie es 134 Cassette Tape and Player Maintenance 248 Catalyst Full Message 000000 419 CD Compact Disc Player 202 210 224 Cellular Phone au sd ee ERI ER Ee aS 89 Center High Mounted Stop Light 464 Center Lap Bells ie EE BE Ee RS BE RE 44 Center Seat Storage Compartment 169 170 Certification Label i src e HERBERG 347 Charge Air Cooler iia sic e dore n Demisie 435 Chart lire Sizing urb ed ete ea da 316 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 194 Child Restraint llle 61 62 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 65 69 Child S88b 5 2 ss Ke ER o EER S 62 68 Cigar Lightef 15 2564 ER Re REY RE 164 Cleaning Wheels me sais ob cy ci RE EM ares 449 Climate Control sies es eee 250 COCK si n as EE ae eens GE 199 204 212 225 238 Closed Crankcase V
206. ent leakage or contamination of the grease If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type 426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Front Prop Shaft Lubrication Lubricate the front driveshaft grease fitting at each oil change listed in the appropriate Maintenance Schedule for your vehicle Use Mopar type MS 6560 lithium based grease or equivalent FRONT E Em ue Al HEC BEES ed HE 195 9 n a E z AN x V CNN su O N AC GREASE FRONT DRIVESHAFT AT EACH OIL CHANGE INTERVAL GREASE FITTING IN LOCATION OF ARROW ABOVE 81550037 Front Driveshaft Grease Fitting Front Axle Universal Drive Joints And Ball Joints The front axle universal joint and ball joints are perma nently lubricated and do not require servicing Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks doors liftgate and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the appli cation of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should
207. ent Cluster Description 189 Warnings and Cautions esia cuspe gere eaea 7 Warranty Information lt ss EE EE ss Ee ee 493 Washers Windshield 138 427 Washing Vehicle 0 0 20 EE ae Ee 447 Water Driving Through 4i bt nn 306 Wheel Alignment and Balance 331 Wheel and Wheel Trim less 449 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 449 Wheel Changing ease serae dore Rode ta 380 Wheel Coyet s sos PERS 4x REDE GEI RES 386 Wheel Mounting llle 381 Wheel Nut Torque 385 389 Wind Buffeting EE EE EE EE EE Ee ee 33 162 Window Fogging 0 0 eee 261 Windows ee EE tee ae es a donet bored 31 l OWOE Less eres o ordre OE e Pub Doe A 31 Rear Sliding ss Ee ED qoe Pee Oros 33 175 Windshield Defroster iss 251 254 Windshield Washers ee Ee 137 138 427 dT EN EE eie d s 137 427 Windshield Wiper Blades 427 Windshield Wipers 0000000000 ee 137 Wiper Blade Replacement ccecce sares sacie tis 427 Wipers Intermittent ee diaa dsa s sa 137 YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure 449
208. entilation CCV Filter 420 Clutch Linkage Maintenance 438 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 249 Compact Spare Tire ais enst eia EE eee eee 327 Compass Calibration 0000 152 Compass Variance cele 153 Console Overhead 0 0 00 cee eee 144 Contract Service ee ee 492 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 432 Cooling 5ystem tsa ae ee cd eee RE RE ee RR 429 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 431 Coolant Capaeity eas bie BREED ke 470 Coolant Level ESE ESE sss 429 430 433 Disposal of Used Coolant 0 432 Drain Flush and Refill 430 en INDEX 503 Inspection ss eb ee REED RE IDE Ie DRR 433 Points to Remember ie Se se 433 Pressure Cap iss le REDES cha p RE 432 Radiator Cap EE EE EE EE eee 432 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 430 471 Temperature Gauge 0 enua ta d aiai 191 Cruise Control Speed Control 141 Cup Holdef ss oos arti KEER ESE RE bek ds 166 Customer Assistance ie es eee 490 Customer Programmable Features 149 Data Recorder Event 0 0 00 eee 59 Daytime Running Lights 133 Dealer Service 4 acai at Se ob ae ede eh died 404 Defroster Rear Window 87 174 Defroster Windshield 77 251 254 Delay Intermittent Wipers 137 Diesel Exhaust Brake 000 04 283 Diesel
209. er This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears HEAD LAMP OFF DELAY 0 SEC When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the RESET button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears KEY OFF POWER DELAY OFF When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the RESET button until Off 45 sec 5 min 10 min appears NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 e ILLUMINATED APRCH gt OFF When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter To make your selection press and release the RESET button until OFE 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears NOTE If this feature is enabled the headlamps will be on during the engine pre heat and cold crank therefore it is recommended that the feature be disabled when overnight ambient temperature is at or below 20F 7C t
210. er 3 Beh aq 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 MPEG 2 Audio 112 96 80 64 Layer 3 24 2205 16 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions CD Mode for MP3 Audio Play SEEK Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next MP3 File Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays the beginning of the MP3 file Pressing the button within the first ten seconds plays the previous file
211. er cable to negative post of booster battery Connect the other end of the jumper cable to a good ground on the engine block of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure a good connection is made free of dirt and grease WARNING e Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharge battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode During cold weather when temperatures are be low freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode The battery temperature must be brought up above freezing point before attempting jump start 3 Take care that the clamps from one cable do not inadvertently touch clamps from the other cable Do not lean over the battery when making connection The negative connection must provide good electrical con ductivity and current carrying capacity 4 After the engine is started or if the engine fails to start cables must be disconnected in the following order a Disconnect the negative cable at the engine ground b Disconnect the negative cable at the negative post on booster battery c Disconnect the cable from the positive post of both batteries 394 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Sx WARNING Any procedure other than above could result in 1 Personal injury caused by electrolyte sguirting out the battery vent 2 Personal injury or property damage due to
212. er to the HANDS FREE PHONE UConnect section of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SALES CODE RAQ AM FM CD 6 DISC RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO HANDS FREE PHONE AND VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEMS VES CAPABILITIES NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate 4 RW FF i44 SEEK gt gt LOAD 0 va x dra AM M E Q Pa CORDS 6 DISC MP3 SET 1 2 3 4 5 8 RND DIR l S amp I ES ev 81365bb1 RAO Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last p
213. ery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with Center Storage Compartment accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be Push the upper button on the front of the armrest to raise driven a sufficient length of time to allow the the upper cover Inside is a power outlet if equipped a generator to recharge the vehicle s battery cut out for a cell phone charger cord removable coin holder if equipped and a divider to configure the NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 storage area into separate compartments Lift the lower handle on the front of the armrest and raise the armrest for access to the lower storage bin On Ouad Cab and Mega Cab models the rear of the floor console offers a power outlet a tip out bin and a rear air duct Mega Cab Only WARNING e This armrest is not a seat Anyone seated on the armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle operation or an accident Only use the center seating position when the armrest is fully upright In an accident the latch may open if the total weight of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs 4 5 kg These items could be thrown about endanger ing occupants of the vehicle Items stored should not exceed a total of 10 Ibs 4 5 kg CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle
214. es NOTE Care should be taken in disposing of used fluids from your vehicle Used fluids indiscriminately dis carded can present a problem to the environment Con tact your local dealer service station or government agency for advice on recycling programs and for where used fluids and filters can be properly disposed of in your area NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417 Drain a small amount from the fuel water separator filter monthly or when the WATER IN FUEL indicator lamp is on Turn the drain valve located on the bottom of the filter counterclockwise and allow any accumulated water to drain into an approved container Leave the drain valve open until all water and contaminants have been removed Close the drain valve by turning it clockwise when clean fuel is visible NOTE The Fuel Water separator drain valve is located on the bottom of the fuel filter housing If more than a couple ounces of fuel has been drained follow the directions below for Priming if the engine has run out of fuel WARNING Do not open the high pressure fuel system with the engine running Engine operation causes high fuel pressure High pressure fuel spray can cause serious injury or death Priming if the engine has run out of fuel 1 Add a substantial quantity of fuel to the tank 5 to 10 gallons 19L to 38L 2 Crank the engine for 1 to 2 seconds If the engine does not start then release the key or starter button back to t
215. es should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Dry with a soft tissue FUSES INTEGRATED POWER MODULE An integrated Power Module is located in the engine com
216. ess 161 Prevents Vehicle EA EG Pinch Protect Features scare assueti orewa ss 162 It Equipped ss sd ee esaii emee emt 145 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEE 82 Pinch Protect Override 162 Venting Sunroof Express 162 Sunshade Operation ills 162 Wind Buffeting sie 236488 ER WE 162 Sunroof Maintenance lisse ss 163 Sunroof Fully Closed s sciis ee ee ee 163 Bi Electrical Power Outlets ies ee ee 163 Bl Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver 164 N Cupholdeis 4 2222 osos E RR 166 Front Instrument Panel Cupholders 40 20 40 Seats Automatic Transmission 166 Front Instrument Panel Cupholders Bucket Seats Automatic Transmission 167 Front Instrument Panel Cupholders Manual Transmission ay agia a a E eee 168 Rear Cupholder Quad Cab f Egupp d lt eresetesesere issis RE 168 Rear Cupholder Mega Cab 168 ei POETE 169 Center Storage Compartment 40 20 40 Seat If Equipped x esse Rma 169 Center Storage Compartment Bucket Seats If Equipped essem RR men 170 Storage And Seats Quad Cab Models 172 Storage And Seats Mega Cab Models 172 Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers Mega Cab Models sva Rer x ERR REA 174 Ne
217. essing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone Fade and Balance See Radio Mode AM FM Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Switches the Radio to the Radio mode RND PTY Button Random Play Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace NOTE MP3 and WMA Random Play are for file folders only Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the tracks Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature If the RW button is pressed the current track will reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 Buttons 1 6 CD MODE for CD Audio Play Selects disc positions 1 6 for Play Load Eject Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CD ROM CD R and CD RW Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs reco
218. evice may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your Keyless Entry Transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak batteries in transmitter The expected life of the batteries is from one to two years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Transmitter Battery Service NOTE Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 With the transmitter buttons facing down remove the small screw and separate the two halves of the transmit ter Make sure not to damage the rubber gasket during removal 2 Remove and replace the battery When replacing the a battery match the sign on battery to the sign on the inside of the battery clip located on back cover Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it 91195012 with rubbing alcohol Transmitter Battery Replacement NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply see www dtsc ca gov hazardouswas
219. ey You can insert the key with either side up To lock the door turn the key rearward to unlock the door turn the key forward See Section 7 of this manual for door lock lubrication NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two 2 seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the engine NOTE A key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will turn on for three 3 seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two 2 seco
220. fect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals The best time to check the oil level is before starting the engine after it has been parked overnight When checking oil after operating the engine first ensure the engine is at full operating tem perature then wait at least 30 minutes after engine shutdown to check the oil Checking the vehicle while it s on level ground will also improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Add oil only when the level on the dipstick is below the ADD mark The total capacity from the low mark to the high mark is 2 quarts 1 9 liters CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ADD OIL MARK FULL RANGE MARK 80698712 Never operate the engine with oil level below the ADD mark or above the upper SAFE mark Change Engine Oil 6 7L Diesel Engine Follow the 6 7L Diesel Maintenance Schedule for recom mended engine oil change intervals Engine Oil Selection 6 7L Diesel Engines For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacture only recommends
221. ferential components Operation of the vehicle in water as may be encountered in some off highway types of service will require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage Limited Slip Differentials in vehicles equipped with 10 5 11 5 Axles DO NOT REQUIRE any limited slip oil additive friction modifiers Transfer Case If Equipped Fluid Level Check This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler plug The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level position Drain And Refill Follow the Maintenance Schedule for recommended transfer case fluid change intervals Lubricant Selection Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the correct lubricant type Manual Transmission If Equipped Fluid Level Check This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler plug If the level of the lubricant is more than 1 4 below the bottom of the filler hole while the vehicle is on level ground enough lubricant should be added to bring the level to the bottom of the filler hole 440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Lubricant Selection for 6 Speed Manual Transmission If Equipped If it becomes necessary to add fluid or change the fluid be sure to use the same lubricant or equivalent Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the correct lubricant type Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Check The fluid level should be checked when the engine is
222. for selecting a new transfer case position have been met To retry the selection turn the control knob back to the current position wait five 5 seconds and retry selection To find the shift require ments refer to the Shifting Procedure for your transfer case located in this section of the owner s manual The SERVICE 4WD warning light monitors the electric shift 4WD system If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving it means that the AWD system is not functioning properly and that service is required es STARTING AND OPERATING 301 WARNING Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the Service 4WD light is illu minated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning The transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take place Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of 4 wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumferenc
223. from you 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEE ed Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree at the end of this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The UConnect system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the UConnect system from idle simply press the Phone button and follow audible prompts for directions All UConnect system sessions begin with a press of the Phone button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone owner s manual The UCon nect website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing The following are general phone to UConnect System pairing instructions e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts e You will be asked
224. ft lever This light will illuminate when the TOW HAUL OD OFF button is pushed twice 13 Temperature Gauge E The temperature gauge indicates engine coolant CRT temperature Any reading within the normal range indicates that the cooling system is operat ing satisfactorily The gauge needle will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather up mountain grades in heavy traffic or when towing a trailer If the needle rises to the 245 F mark stop the vehicle shift into N Neutral and increase the engine idle speed for 2 to 3 minutes If the temperature reading does not return to normal shut your engine OFF and allow it to cool Seek authorized service immediately See Cooling System information in the section on Maintain ing Your Vehicle 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNNENEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE CAUTION Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the en gine running as you would not be able to react to the temperature indicator if the engine overheats NOTE Engine idle speed will automatically increase to 1000 rpm at elevated coolant temperatures to improve engine cooling NOTE If the gauge pointer moves to either extreme of the gauge the Check Gages indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound 14 Security Light The light will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is arming The light will flash at a slower rate a
225. fter the alarm is set The security light will also come on for about two seconds when the ignition is first turned ON 15 Transmission Range Indicator Automatic Transmissions Only When the gear selector lever is moved on vehicles with the 68RFE transmission this indicator shows the auto matic transmission gear range selected P R N D Ve hicles equipped with Auto 6 Electronic Range Select ERS will display the selection of the desired top gear in the position next to the D Drive 16 Odometer Trip Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 If the odometer reading is changed during repair or replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage To toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer press the Odometer Trip Odometer Button To reset the Trip Odometer press and hold the button while in trip mode until the Trip Odometer resets Vehicle Warning Messages When the appropriate conditions exist messages such as door indicates that a door s may be ajar gASCAP which indicates that your gas cap is possibly loose or damaged and noFUSE indicates that the IOD fuse is removed from the Integrated Power Module will dis play in the odometer NOTE Most warnings will display in the EVIC Elec
226. fully warmed up and the fluid in the transmission is at normal operating temperature Operation of the trans mission with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transmission and of the fluid Check the fluid level whenever the vehicle is serviced Procedure For Checking Fluid Level To properly check the automatic transmission fluid level the following procedure must be used 1 Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating temperature 2 The vehicle must be on level ground 3 Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake pedal 4 Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear position ending with the lever in P Park 5 Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated 6 Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat ing temperature Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on both sides of the dipstick If the fluid is low add as required into the dipstick tube Do not overfill After adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube wait ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441 a minimum of two 2 minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level NOTE If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two COLD lower holes on the dipsti
227. g If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS The auxiliary electrical outlet can provide power for in cab accessories designed for use with the standard cigar lighter plug The outlet is located in the instrument panel below and to the right of the Climate Control Panel A cap is attached to the outlet base indicating Power Outlet 12V 20A There is an additional Power Outlet inside the center console of vehicles equipped with 40 20 40 or Bucket front seats There is also a Power Outlet located on the rear of the center console for Quad Cab or Mega Cab vehicles only equipped with bucket seats The outlet s has have a fused direct feed from the battery so it they receive power whether the ignition is ON or OFF All accessories connected to this these outlet s should be removed or turned OFF when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge NOTE If desired all of the power outlets can be converted by your authorized dealer to provide power with the ignition switch in the ON position only 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEE CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIV
228. g Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the V button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffetin
229. g and Service Chart Diesel Engines Noise Systems Maintenance Chart and Service Log Insert Month Day Year under column mileage closest to the mileage at which service was performed MILES 7 500 15 000 22 500 30 000 137 500 45 000 52 500 60 000 KILOMETERS 12000 124000 136000 48000 60000 72 000 84000 96 000 Exhaust system inspect Air cleaner assembly inspect ODOMETER READING PERFORMED BY PERFORMED AT MILES 67 500 75 000 182 500 190 000 197 500 84 000 10500 112 500 KILOMETERS 108 000 120 000 132 000 144 000 126 000 156 000 168 000 181 000 Exhaust system inspect Air cleaner assembly inspect ODOMETER READING PERFORMED BY PERFORMED AT NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447 Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit
230. g the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE WARNING Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat adjust the seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat next to your arm in the rear seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one
231. gs 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a non matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly 1 This spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitor ing sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the spare tire 2 If you install the full size spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 341 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 10 min utes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the full size spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of
232. h vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Battery Blanket Usage A battery loses 60 of its cranking power as the battery temperature decreases to 0 F 18 For the same de crease in temperature the engine requires twice as much power to crank at the same RPM The use of 120 VAC powered battery blankets will greatly increase starting capability at low temperatures Suitable battery blankets are available from your authorized Mopar dealer Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time 424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be discon
233. he RUN position do not turn the key back to the OFF position The electric fuel transfer pump will continue to run and purge air from the system for about 25 seconds After 25 seconds attempt to start the engine again 3 Start the engine using the Normal Starting Procedure 418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Repeat the procedure if the engine does not start WARNING CAUTION Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending agent They can be unstable under certain conditions and be hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel fuel Do not engage the starter motor for more than 15 seconds at a time Allow two minutes between the cranking intervals NOTE The engine may run rough until the air is forced CAUTION from all the fuel lines CAUTION Due to lack of lubricants in alcohol or gasoline the use of these fuels can cause damage to the fuel system Diesel fuel will damage black top paving surfaces Drain the filter into an appropriate container NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 NOTE A maximum blend of 5 biodiesel meeting ASTM specification D 6751 may be used with your Cummins Diesel eguipped vehicle Use of bio diesel mixture in excess of 5 can negatively impact the on engine fuel filter s ability to separate water from the fuel resulting in high pressure fuel system corrosion or dam age NOTE As sufficient testing has not been completed ethanol blends are not recommended or approved for u
234. he snow tire to determine any maximum vehicle speed requirement associated with the tire These tires should always be operated at the vehicle maximum capacity inflation pressures under any load condition While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and develop irregular wear patterns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving found in the Maintenance Schedules Section of this manual More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed ES E FRONT E ME 80316864 NOTE On Canadian vehicles only if your Ram truck is equipped with All Season type tires on the front and ON OFF Ro
235. he damper should be inspected for damage if a belt is frayed Engine Air Cleaner Filter 6 7L Diesel Engines CAUTION All air entering the engine intake must be filtered The abrasive particles in unfiltered air will cause rapid wear to engine components The air filter housing on your Diesel Ram is equipped with a Filter Minder This is an air flow restriction gauge that will indicate when the filter element needs to be replaced Do not remove the top of the air filter housing to inspect the filter element on your diesel engine under normal operating conditions NOTE The air filter housing contains a Mass Air Flow sensor This sensor is critical to proper engine operation and component longevity Any damage or modification MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 to this sensor could result in major engine and or exhaust aftertreatment damage This includes the use of non approved air filters Use only MOPAR approved air filters or equivalent The clear plastic housing on the Filter Minder allows you to view the amount of air pressure drop across the filter element It consists of a diaphragm and a calibrated 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M spring sealed inside the plastic housing As the air cleaner filter becomes clogged and air pressure drop across the filter element increases a yellow disc travels along a graduated scale on the side of the Filter Minder The y
236. he display These radios will also display the current station name and program type For more information such as song title and artist press the MSG or INFO button A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Selecting a Channel Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for the next channel Press the top of the button to search up and the bottom of the button to search down Holding the TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until the button is released Press and release the SCAN button if equipped to automatically change channels every 7 seconds The radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before moving on to the next channel The word SCAN will appear in the display between each channel change Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search NOTE Channels that may contain objectionable content can be blocked Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888 539 7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblock ing Please have your ESN SID information available NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 Storing and Selecting Pre Set Channels In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre set stations you may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button memory These satellite channel pre set stations will not erase any AM or FM pre set memory stations Follow the memory pre set procedures that apply to your radio Using the PTY Program Type Button If Equippe
237. he driver s door lock switch in the LOCK direction 6 A single chime will be heard to indicate the feature has been disabled 7 To reactivate this feature repeat the above steps 8 If a chime is not heard program mode was canceled before the feature could be disabled If necessary repeat the above procedure Auto Unlock On Exit If Eguipped This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when any door is opened This will occur only after the vehicle has been shifted into the Park position after the vehicle has been driven shifted out of Park and all doors closed Auto Unlock On Exit Programming If Equipped Customer Programming sequence to enable or disable the Auto Unlock Feature e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 3 of this manual for details NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC performing the following procedure 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt fastening the seat belt will cancel any chimes that may be confusing during this program ming procedure 3 Insert the key into the ignition 4 Within 15 seconds cycle the key from the LOCK position to the ON RUN position a minimum of four times ending in the LOCK position do not sta
238. he front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle See Recreational Towing for more infor mation NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 303 Shifting Procedure Electronically Shifted Transfer Case 81a4283e Transfer Case Switch NOTE If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift The indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met To retry a shift return the control knob back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five 5 seconds and try the shift again NOTE If all the requirements to select a new transfer case position have been met the current position indica tor light will turn OFF the selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift When the shift is complete the indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON 2WDe 4WD LOCK Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position Shifts between 2WD and 4HI can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turning the control switch If the vehicle is stopped the ignition
239. he mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Electronic Power Mirrors If Equipped Vehicles and other objects seen in a right side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your right side convex mirror could cause you to collide with an other vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the right side convex mirror Some vehicles will not have a convex right side mirror Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature All 6 x 9 inch exterior mirrors are hinged and may be Power Mirror Movement moved either forward or rearward to resist damage The The controls for the power mirrors are located on the hinges have three detent positions full forward full driver s door trim panel rearward and normal Power Mirror Switches Set the top switch to the left or right for the left or right mirror and set it to the center off position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror when you are finished adjusting the mirror To adjust a mirror select left or right with the top switch and press one of the four arrows for the direction you want the mirror to move UN
240. he rotary knob at the center of the control panel controls the temperature of the interior air You can choose your degree of comfort by rotating the knob The coldest temperature setting 816463c9 iS to the extreme left blue region and the warmest setting is to the extreme right red region of the rotation Circulation The cab is designed with features to promote outside air circulation There are grilles in the cab back panel These are air exhausters that provide the means for regular exchange of cab air Side window demisters direct air flow specifically to the window glass to help prevent interior fogging of the glass They are located in the extreme outside upper edges of the instrument panel The demisters also pro vide extra air ducts for circulation They are in operation whenever the Floor Mix or Defrost modes are in use To remove frost from the side windows it is best to use the full defrost mode NOTE When you turn off the engine you may hear a hissing sound from under the hood for a short period of time This is a normal condition that occurs if the air conditioning system has been on It is not an indication of a problem with the air conditioning system 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Air Conditioning with Dual Zone Temperature Air Conditioning and Heating Operation Control If Equipped To turn on the Air Conditioning set the fan control at any With the Dual Zone Temperature Control System ea
241. he same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Addi tive Technology HOAT coolant When adding coolant a minimum solution of 50 rec ommended Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technol ogy or equivalent in water should be used Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water engine coolant solution 432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M The use of lower guality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant and to insure that coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add coolant
242. he scan button a second time to cancel the feature Changing Tape Direction If you wish to change the direction of tape travel side being played press Preset 6 The lighted arrow in the display window will show the new direction Metal Tape Selection If a standard metal tape is inserted into the player the player will automatically select the correct equalization Pinch Roller Release If ignition power or the radio ON OFF switch is turned off the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect the tape from any damage When power is restored to the tape player the pinch roller will automatically reengage and the tape will resume play 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Noise Reduction The Dolby Noise Reduction System is on whenever the tape player is on but may be switched off To turn off the Dolby Noise reduction System Press Preset 1 after you insert the tape The NR light in the display will go off when the Dolby System is off Dolby noise reduction is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo ratories Licensing Corporation Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE Note This Radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs wi
243. he vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h NOTE Do not attempt to shift to or from 4L while the transmission is in gear or clutch is engaged Transfer Case Reminder Light The four wheel drive operating light 4WD located in the instrument cluster is used to alert the driver that the front axle is fully engaged and all four wheels are driving Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Operating Information Precautions If Equipped 81a4283e Transfer Case Switch This is an electric shift transfer case and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch Transfer Case Switch which is located on the instrument panel NN STARTING AND OPERATING 299 This Electronically Shifted transfer case provides 4 mode positions 2 rear wheel drive high range 4 wheel drive lock range 4 wheel drive low range and neutral The Electronically Shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the 2 wheel drive position 2WD for normal street and highway conditions dry hard surfaced roads When additional traction is reguired the transfer case 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position see Shifting Procedure section for specific shifting instructions The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving
244. headlights are on high 777 beam 7 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Re minder System BeltAlert in the Occupant Restraints section for more information 8 Speedometer The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per hour and or kilometers per hour NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 9 Oil Pressure Gauge E The pointer should always indicate some oil pres sure when the engine is running A continuous high or low reading under normal driving conditions may indicate a lubrication system malfunction Immedi ate service should be obtained NOTE If the gauge pointer moves to either extreme of the gauge the Check Gages indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound 10 Transfer Case Position For additional information refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in section 5 of this manual 11 TOW HAUL The TOW HAUL button is located at the end of the gear shift lever This light will illuminate when the TOW HAUL button is pushed once 12 OD OFF IF EQUIPPED If equipped the OD OFF button is located at the end of the gear shi
245. his procedure NOTE Although the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts throughout their pregnancies Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended your dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use the seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags AIRBAG KNEE BOLSTER 8163668 This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right front passenger as a supplement to the sea
246. ht The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The gross trailer weight GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or temporary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recom mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The gross combination weight rating GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings in clude a 68 kg 150 Ibs allowance for the presence of a driver NEE ed STARTING AND OPERATING 351 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The max
247. ht will flash 3 times and automatically turn off 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNENEEEEEEEE Passing Light You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on until the lever is released High Beam Low Beam Select Switch Pull the multifunction control lever fully toward the steering wheel to switch the headlights from HIGH or LOW beam High Beam Low Beam UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Intermittent Wiper System Windshield Wipers The intermittent feature of this system was designed for use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable For maximum delay between cycles rotate the control knob into the upper end of the delay range The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until it enters the LOW continual speed position The delay can be regulated from a maximum of about 15 seconds between cycles to a cycle every 2 seconds The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph 16 km or less 815be820 Windshield Wiper Washer Switch The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the multifunction control lever Turn the end of the handle to select the desired wiper speed 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF
248. ic 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEE Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is only supported in the USA NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for USA and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area The UConnect system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UCon nect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towi
249. ic Transmission Your new Ram truck is equipped with two adjustable cupholders The cupholder is opened by pulling on the cup holder door handle on the front surface Each opening in the cupholder is adjustable and will hold cups and mugs of various sizes To secure the cup place the cup to be held into one of the cup wells and then push the cupholder arm toward the cup until it is held stable Cup Holder Door Handle en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 Front Instrument Panel Cupholders Bucket Seats Automatic Transmission If your new Ram truck is equipped with bucket seats there are three cup holders located on the front of the center console EI Cup Holders Automatic Transmission Cup Holders Bucket Seat 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEE Front Instrument Panel Cupholders Manual Rear Cupholder Mega Cab Transmission Mega Cab vehicles are eguipped with rear cupholders i located in the center armrest Cup Holders Manual Transmission Mega Cab Rear Armrest Cup Holder Rear Cupholder Quad Cab If Equipped Quad Cab vehicles may be equipped with a rear cup holder that consists of two cupwells for rear passenger convenience en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 STORAGE removable coin holder if eguipped and two dividers to configure the storage area into compartments For ex ample compartments can be configured
250. icle may be equipped with emergency tow hooks NOTE For off road recovery it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle vehicle Chains may break causing serious injury or death WARNING Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks Tow straps and chains may break causing serious injury 396 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME CAUTION Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Proper towing or lifting eguipment is reguired to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for the purpose following eguip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to the main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed 4 Wheel Drive Vehicles CAUTION To avoid damage to the transfer case while towing always use one of the following methods NOTE The Transfer Case must be in the neutral posi tion and the transmission must be in Park Automatic Transmission or in gear Manual Transmission to tow a 4WD vehicle with one end of the vehicle raised The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the grou
251. if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after success fully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute Off When you mute the UConnect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e Following the beep say Mute off 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEE Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect system allows on going calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an ongo ing call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the UConnect system or vice versa press the Voice Recognition button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different e
252. ification D 6751 may be used with your Cummins Diesel equipped vehicle NOTE In addition commercially available fuel addi tives are not necessary for the proper operation of your Cummins Diesel equipped vehicle NOTE No 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel should only be used where extended arctic conditions 10 F or 23 C exist 344 STARTING AND OPERATING M ADDING FUEL DIESEL ENGINES WARNING CAUTION A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable container that is on a truck bed You could be burned Always place fuel containers on the ground while filling To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling NOTE e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap tank is full The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened e Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 345 CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys tem could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is remo
253. ilize e The cycling action will cause temporary dimming of the headlamps interior lamps and also a noticeable reduction in blower motor speed Cold Weather Precautions Operation in ambient temperature below 32 F 0 C may require special considerations The following charts sug gest these options Fuel Operating Range 6 7L Diesel Engine NOTE Use Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuels ONLY No 2 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel 7 C OF ESEEEELEE EER 18G CF No 2 Ultra Low Sulfur 23 C ap ClimatizedDieselFuel ses No 1 Ultra Low 29 C EA AE EE Sulfur Diesel Fuel 81949058 No 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel should only be used where extended arctic conditions 10 F 23 C exist NN STARTING AND OPERATING 277 NOTE e Use of Climatized Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel or Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel results in a noticeable decrease in fuel economy Climatized Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel is a blend of Number 2 Ultra Low Sulfur and Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuels which reduces the temperature at which wax crystals form in fuel NOTE The engine requires the use of Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel Use of incorrect fuel could result in engine and exhaust system damage Refer to Fuel Re quirements in this section for further details on fuel recommendations Engine Block Heater The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the heater co
254. ill take the force in a collision e A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to Removing Slack From Belt be used together NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 WARNING A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos sible and keep it snug e A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your dealer and have it fixed 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfor
255. ilure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual for additional information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 329 Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Tread wear indicators are in the original eguipment tires grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1 16 inch 2 mm When the tread is worn to the replaced tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven 330 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six
256. imum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the truck These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they re commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers 352 STARTING AND OPERATING M Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer config
257. in the 4WD LOCK and WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause in creased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo nents 81977fda NOTE The transfer case Neutral N position is selected by depressing the recessed button located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch The transfer case Neutral N position is to be used for recreational towing only See the Recreational Towing section for specific procedures on shifting into and out of Neutral N 300 STARTING AND OPERATING M Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Only Transfer case position indicator lights are located in the instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection When you select a different trans fer case position the indicator lights will do the follow ing If All Shift Conditions are Met 1 The current position indicator light will turn OFF 2 The selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift 3 When the shift is complete the indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON If One or More Shift Conditions are not Met 1 The indicator light for the current position will remain ON 2 The newly selected position indicator light will con tinue to flash 3 The transfer case will not shift NOTE Before retrying a selection make certain that all the necessary requirements
258. ing keep the front of the condenser clean also Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Fan Inspection Check the fan for cracks and bent or broken blades If any of these conditions exist you must replace the fan Make sure it is securely mounted NOTE This service procedure must be performed by a trained service technician Make arrangements with your authorized Dodge Truck Dealer for this inspection NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435 Charge Air Cooler Inter Cooler The charge air cooler is positioned between the radiator and the air conditioner condenser Air enters the engine through the air cleaner and passes through the turbo charger where it is pressurized This pressurized air rapidly reaches high temperature The air is then directed through a hose to the charge air cooler and through another hose to the intake manifold of the engine The air entering the engine has been cooled by about 50 to 100 degrees Fahrenheit This cooling process enables more efficient burning of fuel resulting in fewer emissions To guarantee optimum performance of the system keep the surfaces of the charge air cooler condenser and radiator clean and free of debris Periodically check the hoses leading to and from the charge air cooler for c
259. ing indicator lights on the switch indicate that the Heated Seat System needs servicing WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD released you must reach into the opening beneath the center of the grille and push up the latch to release the safety catch before raising the hood To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the front center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage EER Hood Release Lever To open the hood two latches must be released First pull the hood release lever located below the steering wheel at the base of the instrument panel Once the hood is Secondary Latch 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEE LIGHTS WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision Be sure all hood latches are latched fully before driving He
260. ings These weights are specified on the Safety Com pliance Certification Label on the driver s side door opening NOTE Detach the snowplow when transporting pas sengers Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to specifica tions at the factory without consideration for the weight of the plow Front end tow in should be checked and reset if necessary at the beginning and end of the snowplow season This will help prevent uneven tire wear The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle is parked Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow eguip ment following the recommendations provided by the specific snowplow manufacturer Over the Road Operation With Snowplow Attached The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and causes the engine to operate at higher than normal temperatures Therefore when transporting the plow angle the blade completely and position it as low as road or surface conditions permit Do not exceed 40 mph 64 km h The operator should always maintain a safe stopping distance and allow adeguate passing clearance STARTING AND OPERATING 367 Methods For Removing Snow q PILE Gee BACK DRAG mome DRIVEWAYS PARKING LOT STREET Operating Tips Under ideal snow plowing conditions 20 mph 32 km h should be maximum operating speed The operator should be familiar with the area and surface to be cleaned Reduce speed and use extreme caution when plowing unfamiliar areas
261. ion D 975 Grade S15 will provide good perfor mance If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold below 20 F or 7 C or is required to operate at colder than normal conditions for prolonged periods use climatized No 2 diesel fuel or dilute the No 2 diesel fuel with 50 No 1 diesel fuel This will provide better protection from fuel gelling or wax plugging of the fuel filters NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 343 WARNING Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending agent They can be unstable under certain conditions and hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel fuel Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water To prevent fuel system trouble drain the accumulated water from the fuel water separator using the fuel water separator drain provided If you buy good guality fuel and follow the cold weather advice above fuel conditioners should not be required in your vehicle If available in your area a high cetane premium diesel fuel may offer improved cold starting and warm up performance Fuel Specifications The Cummins Turbocharged Charge Air Cooled Diesel engine has been developed to take advantage of the high energy content and generally lower cost No 2 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel or No 2 Ultra Low Sulfur climatized diesel fuels Experience has shown that it also operates on No 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuels or other fuels within specification NOTE A maximum blend of 5 biodiesel meeting ASTM spec
262. ional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles a few kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot coolant to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle 434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent coolant additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pres sure tested for leaks Maintain coolant concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air condition
263. ious customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained techni cians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction A MESSAGE FROM DAIMLERCHRYSLER CORPORATION DaimlerChrysler Corporation and Cummins welcome you as a new Dodge Ram Cummins Turbo Diesel powered truck owner Almost 100 of the heavy duty trucks in the United States and Canada are diesel powered because of the fuel economy rugged durability and high torque which per mits pulling heavy loads Cummins engines power well over half of these trucks Now this same technology and proven performance is yours in your new Dodge Ram truck equipped with the Cummins Turbocharged Charge Air Cooled Diesel engine Your diesel truck will sound feel drive and operate differently from a gasoline powered truck It is important that you read and understand this manual You may find that some of the starting operating and maintenance procedures are different However they are simple to NEE INTRODUCTION 5 follow and c
264. ire pressure will vary with temperature by approxi mately 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than 3 hours and in outside ambient temperature Refer to the Tires General Information in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 337 The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low tem perature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recom mended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS warning lamp to be turned off The system will automatically update and the TPMS warning lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be drive
265. it is important to ensure the cover is prop Run Acc erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so 40 20 Amp Power IGN Run Acc may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Yellow Cigar Lighter Rear Module and possibly result in a electrical system Power Point failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to 42 30 Amp Diesel PCM Diesel use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected Pink Only 456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M VEHICLE STORAGE If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days we recommend that you take the following steps to mini mize the drain on your vehicle s battery e Disconnect the Ignition Off Draw fuse LO D fuse located in the Integrated Power Module located in the engine compartment The LO D cavity includes a snap in retainer that allows the fuse to be discon nected without removing it from the fuse block The electronic shift transfer case should be placed in the 4HI mode and kept in this position to minimize the battery drain e As an alternative to the above steps you may discon nect the negative cables from both batteries e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or
266. itter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system To unlock the doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob once to unlock only the driver s door or twice to unlock all the doors When the UNLOCK button is pressed the illuminated entry will initiate the parking lights will flash on twice and if installed the cargo lamp will turn on for 30 seconds The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors or drivers door only upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the following procedure e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 3 of this manual for details 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle 2 Press and hold the LOCK button on your key 3 Continue to hold the LOCK button at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 4 Release both buttons at the same time 5 This will enable you to unlock all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button 6 To reactivate this feature repeat the above steps To lock the doors Pre
267. k On Repeat steps 3 through 7 of the normal starting procedure NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 273 For Extremely Cold Weather Starting Engine Manifold Air Temperature Below 0 F 18 C In extremely cold weather below 0 F 18 C it may be beneficial to cycle the manifold heaters twice before attempting to start the engine This can be accomplished by turning the ignition OFF for at least 5 seconds and then back ON after the WAIT TO START light has gone off but before the engine is started However repeated cycling of the manifold heaters will result in damage to the heater elements or reduced battery voltage NOTE If multiple pre heat cycles are used before starting additional engine run time may be required to maintain battery state of charge at a satisfactory level e If the engine stalls after the initial start the ignition must be turned to the OFF position for at least 5 seconds and then to the ON position to recycle the manifold heaters NOTE Excessive white smoke and poor engine perfor mance will result if manifold heaters are not recycled e Heat generated by the manifold heaters dissipates rapidly in a cold engine If more than two minutes pass between the time the WAIT TO START light goes OFF and the engine is started recycle the manifold heaters by turning the ignition OFF for at least 5 seconds and then back ON If the vehicle is driven and vehicle speed exceeds 19 mph 31 km before the manifold heater p
268. kage osse dee EE ex RE nase DA ep we 425 POWET eracus EER ROER RR EER REEL RA 314 424 Wheel Lock oy death ea ak 18 Wheel Tit 3 206 605 ee RR EER ae a E EORR 139 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls ee ee ee t rannis 246 Storage Behind the Seat ie ee ee ee ee 169 Storage Compartment Center Seat 169 170 Storage Velicle ix aise se bie ey dpa aep Reg 456 Storing Your Vehicles sess srr ee ee ee ee ee ee 456 SUT ROOT x3 xs trcs duet ede Gu eed 160 Supplemental Tire Pressure Information 332 Synthetic Engine Oil llle 278 409 System Navigation lle 238 Tachometer use taa ke eed SR RA RE es 190 Tailgate pe iced dodo emisse haa TASSE US ae 181 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 65 69 Tilt Steering Column 2 eee 139 Tire and Loading Information Placard 319 332 Tire Identification Number TIN 318 Tir Markings egy Re Rm RR 315 Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS Placard HI MAX Load Switch 187 Tire Safety Information ee ee ee ee ee 315 Kis EA NOR ETE 78 323 496 Aging Life of Tires sasies EE ERA baw eges 329 Air Press re soreo Rik ei RE gira a Sige AE BOE eae IR 323 Alignment sis Ee RR EDE ob tee G4 Sah hed 331 Chains OOR Se Re ee Haas OAS RR 332 Changing ie ie 25 GR RR see oe Rete 380 Compact Spare iad Be lig Rs ere RR EUR n 327 PERE EER EE T trip es 335 387 General Information SS ES Es ee 323 High Speed NEN
269. l Filter Change csek darda neau ee Rea rss 410 Onboard Diagnostic System Opener Garage Door HomeLink 154 Operating Precautions ee ee ee ee ee ee 403 Out of Park Sense Alarm SS ee 291 Outside Rearview Mirrors SS SS ss se 85 Overdrive serseri 044 Raa CX Y eX RR EER RE 288 Overdrive OFF Switch SS ss se 288 Overhead Console 00 000 cee eee 144 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 495 Panic Alarm SS SE ee ees 24 Parking Brake corce se eR tifs ER RE 309 Passenger Airbag On Off Switch 54 Passing Lights Es ecce ERR Ek nt pas 136 Pedals Adjustable re 140 Perform Service Indicator Reset 148 479 Personal Settings ii ses re deem obs 149 Phone Cellular 4 2222 82040448 PERE 48 89 Phone Hands Free UConnect 89 Pick p BOX eee e ae ae rhea te 179 en INDEX 511 Placard Tire and Loading Information 319 Power Distribution Center Fuses 451 Door Locks s a us panes see hd en vetoes 27 Mirrors c8 EE EE 39 3E B S ES 86 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 163 TERT EE ura exo e rebas Ea Eee 120 Sliding Rear Window 04 33 175 Steering as sa EE BAR ER ENE paie aesa 314 424 SUNrOO cus edes Ters De EE ok p tete Ros ace 160 WindOWS 665425060 ES ex em x cR wwe E 31 Power Steering Fluid 004 473 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 46 Pretensioners Seat Belts ss san s
270. lace and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the key is not ON the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing NOTE Flashing neutral N position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the Neutral N position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case Neutral N position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move despite the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle 376 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION e Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged e Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid will leak from the transfer case and fluid loss will damage internal parts WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Bl Hazard Warning Flasher 378 H Jacking And Tire Changing 379 All Models If Equipped 379 H Jacking Instructions 00 0 380 Removing The Spare Tire 380 Tire Changing Procedure 381 WD Hoisting EE x ND OG 390 W jump Starting 2 wk eee eee were wa es 391 With Portable Starting Uni
271. layed For your convenience the volume can be turned down but not up when the audio system is off and the ignition is ON NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 Mode Button Radio Mode Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the CD player Satellite Radio or Vehicle Entertainment System VES if eguipped SEEK Button Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped mode Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selec tion Holding the button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it MUTE Button Radio Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will be displayed Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control turning the radio ON OFF or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers NOTE In Hands Free Phone if equipped mode the MUTE button mutes the microphone SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time MSG or INFO Button Radio Mo
272. lectronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue tooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system then follow the instruction described in your cellular phone user s manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the Voice Recogni tion button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Select another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone with the UConnect system The phone must have been previously paired to the UConnect system that you want to use it with Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select
273. light or side marker turn signal park light bulb Do not touch the headlight halogen bulb 10 Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and hous ing NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461 Fog Lights 2 Pull bulb straight from the connector 1 Reach under the vehicle unlock and twist connector counterclockwise 1 4 turn and remove connector and bulb from housing 462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Tail Stop Turn and Backup Lights 2 Pull the housing straight out from the body with a quick motion to separate the housing from the body If not pulled straight locators may be damaged 1 Remove the two 2 screws that pass through the bed sheetmetal Pulling Housing From Body Removing the Two 2 Screws MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463 3 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove 4 Pull bulb straight out of socket from the housing 8 i Pulling Bulb From Socket Rotating Bulb Socket From Housing 464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Reverse Procedure to install bulb and housing Place the two raised blocks passed the body Sliding Raised Blocks Past Body Center High Mounted Stoplight CHMSL With Cargo Light 1 Remove the two 2 screws holding the housing lens to the body as shown 80d27b57 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465 2 Separate the connector holding the housing and wir 4 Pull desired bulb straight from the socket ing harness to the body 80d27b7a e Outside Bul
274. lite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satel lite Radio This service offers over 100 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of SIRIUS audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will contact you to supply a welcome kit and to confirm subscription information including the set up of your on line listening account at no additional charge For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Num ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio system To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access with REF Radios With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF press the CD Eject and Time buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds
275. llow the gear train to stop Move the shift lever from the Neutral position straight across and back into Reverse Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged as this will cause abnormal wear on the clutch Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both fuel economy and performance it should be upshifted as listed in recommended shift speed chart Shift at the vehicle speeds listed for acceleration Earlier upshifts during cruise conditions steady speeds will result in increased fuel economy and may be used as indicated Mode 2 to 3 3 to 4 4to5 5to6 Accel amp Cruise 15 24 25 40 40 64 45 72 Downshifting Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is recommended to preserve brakes when driving down steep hills In addition downshifting at the right time provides better acceleration when you desire to resume speed Downshift progressively Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch For accelera tion at speeds less than 15 mph 25 km h 2nd gear is recommended 294 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION When descending a hill be very careful to downshift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine which can cause valve damage To prevent clutch and transmission damage your vehicle should be downshifted at speeds no gr
276. lose The Hood 129 Windshield Wipers acea cce ee s 197 PEL rr 130 Windshield Washers ia Ee ger Ra exe 138 Interior Lights llle 131 W Tilt Steering Column 0 0 139 Battery Saver sis ae Es EE RR EIE RR RE N ie 132 NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 H Driver Adjustable Pedals If Equipped 140 Compass Temperature Button 151 Adj stment 2005 4 exe ex Ie ERR 140 W Garage Door Opener If Equipped 154 H Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 14 Programming HomeLink TO Activates sies oe NE ERR ERR OE EE Re 142 Gate Operator Canadian Programming To Set At A Desired Speed issu 142 Using Homelink ee ee ee ee ee To Deactivate 2 osse RLAFIA A petere 142 Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button 159 To Resum Speed us nda te oe Res 142 ees EE GEE EE ET 159 To Vary The Speed Setting 143 Troubleshooting Tips 00 159 To Accelerate For Passing 143 General Information lille 160 E Overhead Console With Electronic Vehicle ll Power Sunroof If Equipped 160 Information Center EVIC Diesel Only 144 Open Sunroof Express Mode 0 000 161 Domi Reais LERE eias Mee e Ee dd Closing Sunroof Expr
277. mes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away e The Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light If Equipped an amber light located in the center of the instrument panel tells the driver and front pas senger when the front passenger airbag is turned off The PAD Indicator lamp illuminates the words PASS AIR BAG OFF to show that the passenger airbag will not inflate during a collision requiring airbags The PAD light will illuminate when the passenger frontal airbag has been turned off by using the manual on off switch 2500 3500 Standard Cab Vehicles Only See Passenger Airbag On Off Switch 2500 3500 Stan dard Cab Vehicles Only in this section for additional information ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on collision severity and occu pant size The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickl
278. mmediate chime will be heard and the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will be reactivated if the ignition is cycled driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be en abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position DaimlerChrysler does not recom mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert 1 With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any position except On or Start buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be reacti vated by repeating t
279. mode Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non filming cleaning solution vinegar and water works very well will help prevent contaminates cigarette smoke perfumes etc from sticking to the windows Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging Summer Operation Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating A 50 concentration is recommended Refer to Recommended Fluids and Genuine Parts for the proper coolant type 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic in hot weather especially when towing a trailer addi tional engine cooling may be required If this situation is encountered operate the transmission in a lower gear to increase engine RPM coolant flow and fan speed When stopped in heavy traffic it may be necessary to shift into NEUTRAL and depress the accelerator slightly for fast idle operation to increase coolant flow and fan speed NOTE On models equipped with Diesel engines the idle speed will automatically increase to 1000 rpm at elevated coolant temperatures to improve engine cooling Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an automatic recirculation system When the system senses a heavy load or high heat conditions it may use partial Recirculation A C
280. mode to provide additional comfort Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstruc tions NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 Operating Tips Chart WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS sv VERY HOT pee amo Start the vehicle open the windows and turn the blower control knob to the high position full clockwise Set Mode control knob at or between 74 and 74 Set temperature control to full cold and press the 4 button on After the hot air has been expelled close the windows and turn the mode control knob to the lt amp gt setting counterclockwise at either 74 or lt 4 or press the C amp gt button if so equipped Once comfortable choose a mode position and adjust temperature control and blower speed as necessary for comfort WARM WEATHER Xt GOA If sunny set the Mode control at or near 73 and press the 2 button on If cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near 73 No C amp gt is necessary COOL OR COLD HUMID A CONDITIONS If sunny set the Mode control at or between 4 and then press the button on If cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near lt 4 No ED is necessary COLD DRY CONDITIONS a In cloudy or dark weather set the Mode control at or near d If sunny set the Mode control at or between d
281. more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again NOTE When reinstalling the IOD fuse push firmly until fully seated the gages in the Instrument Cluster will do a full sweep when the ignition key is cycled to RUN This is a normal condition NOTE When the vehicle is shipped from the factory the IOD fuse is in the up or extracted position If the radio interior lamps keyless entry or other features do not work with the key off check the position of the fuse or check to see if the fuse is blown to ensure that it is fully seated When the IOD fuse is extracted the instru ment cluster in the odometer window will display NO FUSE NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457 REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Inside Bulb No Overhead Console Lights TS 212 2 Dome Lights s siemens 7679 All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base Aluminum base bulbs are not approved LIGHT BULBS Outside Pack Upis ie ew EER Scere Dieta ain Ate tee oh ICD Center High Mounted Stop Lamp Log Lamp ii sie ER 9 9 ERR TAREA EA Headlamp Halogen 0 4 Side Marker Bulb esses ae Eis EN Park amp Turn Signal 2 EE ee EE EE ee Rear License Plate Lamp eie ee ee ee ee 168 Rear Cargo Light sis skons e RR Rb 91
282. mpass Variance is displayed 4 Press and release RESET button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the compass button to exit GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off of your vehi cle s battery NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active WARNING Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety stan dards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or assistance en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 WARNING Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a danger ous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause seri ous injury or death Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons e
283. n for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 kph to receive this information For example your vehicle has a recommended cold tire inflation pressure parked for more than 3 hours placard of 35 241 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi 207 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring lamp Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi 207 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring lamp will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring lamp will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure placard value 338 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always eguipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size eguipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement eguip ment that is not of the same size type and or style After market wheels can cause sensor damage Do NOTE not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire ae your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to and maintenance nor to provide warning of
284. n about the child re straint Refer to the Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode earlier in this section In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the latch plate NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury WARNING Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint
285. n be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if eguipped stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will be displayed Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE Note This Radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism You may eject a disc with the radio OFF If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show
286. names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone book entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phone book entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phone book with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phone book accessible only in that language Phonebook Download UConnect allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the Phone button and say Phonebook Download Sys tem prompts Ready to accept vcard entry via Blue tooth The system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone owners manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e Phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX trans fers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebo
287. nd Acceptable methods are to tow vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly NN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 397 2 Wheel Drive Vehicles Provided that the transmission is operable tow with the transmission in Neutral and the ignition key in the OFF position along with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on the ground Speed must not exceed 30 mph 50 km h and distance must not exceed 15 miles 25 km CAUTION Towing faster than 30 mph 50 km h or for more than 15 miles 25 km can cause severe damage to the transmission If the vehicle is to be towed faster than 30 mph 50 km h or more than 15 miles 25 km the vehicle must be towed with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground It may also be towed on a flatbed or with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a dolly MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS H Engine Compartment 6 7L Diesel Engine 402 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II 403 Bl Replacement Parts ee ee ee ee 403 H Engine Data Plate ee ee EE Ee ee 404 H Dealer Service eee eee 404 W Service Information 000 404 Bl Maintenance Procedures 000 407 Engine Oil 0 0 esses 407 Drive Belt x22 ERRARE EE 412 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 6 7L Diesel Engines eg ke eas 413 Draining Fuel Water
288. nd tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks Extremely cold ambient temperature may require the addition of a winter front for effective operation of the cab heating cooling system Make certain that a percent age of the radiator is exposed for adequate air flow through the charge air cooler and automatic transmission oil cooler The percentage of opening must be increased with the increasing ambient air temperature and or engine load If the cooling fan can be heard cycling frequently increase the size of the opening in the winter front 430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Coolant bottle level check The coolant reserve system provides a guick visual method of determining that the coolant level is adeguate With the engine idling and warmed to the normal operating temperature the level of the coolant on the coolant bottle should be between the fluid level marks Check the coolant level whenever the hood is raised The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no longer a need to remove the coolant pressure cap except for checking coolant freeze point or replacement with new antifreeze coolant WARNING Never add coolant to the radiator when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove pressure cap to cool overheated engine The coolant is under pres sure and severe scalding could result Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill At the intervals sh
289. ndard Cab Vehicles Only How the Airbag System Works The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are de signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC The ORC will not detect roll over or rear collisions The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or RUN positions These include all of the items listed above except the steering wheel and column and knee bolsters If the key is in the OFF position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate Also the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warn a ing light in the instrument panel for 6 to 8 seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the AIRBAG warning light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the AIRBAG warning light either momentarily or continu ously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE WARNING Ignoring the AIRBAG warning light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it co
290. nds If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle ser viced as soon as possible NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting prob lems and loss of security protection 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE CAUTION Exxon Mobil Speed Pass additional Sentry Keys or any other transponder equipped components on the same key chain will not cause a key related transpon der fault unless the additional part is physically held against the ignition key being used when starting the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other RF electronics will not cause interference with this system All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle Always remove Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit PIN number Keep the PIN in a s
291. nected should be done by an experienced repairman Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar bon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro tection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified DaimlerChrysler Dealership NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425 Front Suspension Ball Joints We The ball joints originally supplied with the vehicle are permanently lubricated at the factory and do not require service The ball joints and seals should be inspected whenever the vehicle is serviced for other reasons Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturers recommended Steering Linkage Inspection power steering fluid Whenever the vehicle is hoisted all steering linkage joints should be inspected for evidence of damage If seals are damaged parts should be replaced to prev
292. nent Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Fuel Selection 6 7L Turbo Diesel Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle Fed Engine eral law requires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur High way Diesel fuel 15 ppm Sulfur maximum and prohibits the use of Low Sul fur Highway Diesel fuel 500 ppm Sulfur maximum to avoid damage to the emissions control system For most year round service No 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D 975 Grade S15 will provide good perfor mance If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold below 20 F or 7 C or is required to operate at colder than normal conditions for prolonged periods use climatized No 2 diesel fuel or dilute the No 2 diesel fuel with 50 No 1 diesel fuel This will provide better protection from fuel gelling or wax plugging of the fuel filters This vehicle is fully compatible with biodiesel blends up to 5 biodiesel meeting ASTM specification D 975 NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473 Chassis Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Automatic Transmission Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Transfer Case Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Manual Transmission Fluid G 56 Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Clutch Linkage Multipurpose Grease NLGI Grade 2 E P or equivalent Front and Rear Axle Fluid 2500 3500 GL 5 SAE 75W 90 Synthetic or equivalent Limited slip additiv
293. ng Assistance NOTE The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for USA 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance cover age details in the Warranty information booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is designed to be used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated tele phone system You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as paging service or automated customer service Some services require immediate response selection in some instances that may be too quick for use of UConnect system When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can push the Voice Recognition button and say the seq
294. ng The Engine The temperature of the coolant a mixture of 50 ethylene glycol and 50 water must not exceed the normal range of the temperature gauge 240 F 116 C with a 16 psi 110 kPa radiator cap Usually the coolant temperature indicated during opera tion will be to the left of center in the normal range of the gauge 282 STARTING AND OPERATING M Avoid Low Coolant Temperature Operation Continual operation at low coolant temperature below the normal range on the gauge 140 F 60 C can be harmful to the engine Low coolant temperature can cause incomplete combustion which allows carbon and varnish to form on piston rings and injector nozzles Also the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase diluting the lubricating oil and causing rapid wear to the engine Cooling System Tips Automatic Transmission To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating in high ambient temperature conditions take the following actions e City Driving when stopped put transmission in neutral and increase engine idle speed e Highway Driving reduce your speed e Up Steep Hills select a lower transmission gear but try and keep the torque converter clutch engaged e Air Conditioning turn it off temporarily Do Not Operate The Engine With Low Oil Pressure When the engine is at normal operating temperature the minimum oil pressures required are Idle 700 to 800 RPM 10 psi 69 kP
295. ng brake Starting Procedure Engine Manifold Air Temperature Below 66 19 C NOTE The temperature displayed on the overhead console if equipped does not necessarily reflect the engine manifold air temperature When certain engine m temperatures fall below 66 F 19 C the lamp will remain on indicating the intake manifold heater system is active 272 STARTING AND OPERATING M Follow the steps in the Normal Starting Procedure ex cept CAUTION Do not crank engine for more than 15 seconds at a time or starter motor damage may result Turn key to OFF and wait at least 2 minutes for starter to cool before repeating start procedure e The WAIT TO START light will remain on for a period of time length of time depends on engine tempera ture e After the WAIT TO START light goes off turn the ignition key to START Do not press the accelerator during starting e After engine start up check to see that there is oil pressure e Allow the engine to idle about three minutes until the manifold heaters have completed the post heat cycle e Release the parking brake and drive NOTE Engine idle speed will automatically increase to 1000 rpm at low coolant temperatures to improve engine warm up NOTE If the engine stalls or if the ignition switch is left On for more than 2 minutes after the WAIT TO START light goes out reset the grid heaters by turning the ignition switch to Off for at least 5 seconds and then bac
296. ng through water more than a few inches deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent dam age to your vehicle NN STARTING AND OPERATING 307 Flowing Rising Water CAUTION WARNING Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water n that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is ing water can wear away the road or path s surface under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle s drivetrain components Always inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid Shallow Standing Water appears contaminated as this may resul
297. nt system SRS component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 The passenger front airbag is to be turned off only if the passenger is an infant less than 1 year old who must ride in the front seat because there is no rear seat because the rear seat is too small for a rear facing infant restraint or because the infant has a medical condition which WARNING Whenever an airbag is turned off even a lap shoulder belted passenger may hit their head neck or chest on the dashboard instrument panel or windshield in a crash This may result in serious injury or death makes it necessary for the driver to be able to see the infant is a child age 1 to 12 who must ride in the front seat because there is no rear seat because there is no rear seat position available or because the child has a medical condition which makes it necessary for the driver to be able to see the child To Shut Off the Passenger Airbag 2500 3500 Standard Cab Vehicles Only Place the ignition key in the Passenger Airbag On Off Switch push the key in and turn clockwise and remove the key from the switch This will shut off the passenger side airbag The Off light near the switch will illumi nate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position e hasa medical condition which makes passenger
298. nual Transmission If Equipped 269 Engine Idling In Cold Weather Automatic Transmission If Equipped 269 Stopping The Engine Normal Starting Procedure Engine Manifold Engine Speed Control iese ee 281 LL DO AINE aan signs N Operating Precautions sees EE ee 281 Starting Procedure Engine Manifold Air Temperature Below 66 F 19 C 271 Ae Transmission siese RR REGE ee eee ea 282 Starting Fluids ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 275 Bl Diesel Exhaust Brake Engine Braking Bl Normal Operation Diesel Engine 275 lf Bquipped sissies PERE DE DER DRIE xd ris 283 Cooling System Tips Automatic 266 STARTING AND OPERATING M N Transmission Shifting ese ee ee ee 285 Automatic Transmission With Overdrive 68RFE If Equipped 285 WE Manual Transmission 00005 292 Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds 293 Downshifting 0 0 0 0 0 00000 293 ll Four Wheel Drive Operation If Equipped 294 Manually Shifted Transfer Case Operating Information Precautions 294 Shifting Procedure Manually Shifted Transfer Case Transfer Case Reminder Light Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Operating Information Precautions If Equipped 298 Shifting Procedure Electronically Shifted
299. o prevent excessive drain on batteries during cold cranking e UNIT IN gt US METRIC The EVIC odometer can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the RESET button until US or METRIC appears e COMPASS VARIANCE gt 8 Press the RESET button to change the compass variance setting Refer to Compass Variance in this section for additional information e COMPASS CALIBRATE gt YES Press the RESET button to calibrate the compass Refer to Manual Compass Calibration in this section for additional information Compass Temperature Button Pressing the Compass Temperature button A will return the display to the normal compass temperature display NOTE Temperature accuracy can be effected from heat soak For best accuracy the vehicle should be driven at a speed greater than 25 mph 40 km h for several min utes 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to set the compass manually When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Manual Comp
300. o high will apply crash forces to the abdomen not to the stronger hip bones In either case the risk of internal injuries is greater Wear a lap belt low and snug Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt system in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the airbag control module Like the airbags the pretensioners are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners both must be replaced NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts If the driver unbuckles the seat belt while the vehicle is in motion an i
301. o passen gers 150 Ibs 68 kg each plus 200 lbs 91kg of cargo Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle will be found on the face of the driver s door TIRE CHAINS Use Class U chains on 2500 3500 Ram Trucks or other traction aids that meet SAE Type U specifications NOTE Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain manufacturer CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle tires or chains observe the following precautions e Because of limited chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Broken chains can cause serious vehicle damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could suggest chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Install chains as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 1 2 mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 45 mph 72 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Do not install tire chains on front wheels of 4x2 vehicles Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different than the speed recom mended by the manufacturer NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 3
302. ok entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEE ed the UConnect and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone owners manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will be use only the first 24 characters Edit Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing names in the phone book is recom mended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phone book entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phone book entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phone book you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have
303. ol to increase or decrease the frequency AM EM Button Radio Mode Press the button to select AM or FM Modes Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak ers Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone balance and fade RND PTY Button Radio Mode Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds If no action is taken during the 5 second time out the PTY icon will turn off Turning the tune knob NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to Country Country be selected Many radio stations do not currently broad Oldies Oldies cast PTY inf
304. ome to a pulling it toward you after you have set it in P Make complete stop sure it is in Park before leaving the vehicle NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 287 N Neutral Shift to Neutral when the vehicle is standing for pro longed periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle D Drive Drive range provides underdrive 1st 2nd and 3rd gears direct 4th gear and overdrive 5th and 6th gears The shift into overdrive 5th and 6th gear occurs only after the transmission has completed the shift into 4th gear No other movement of the shift mechanism is required to complete the 4 5 or 5 6 gear shifts The 4th and 5th gear upshifts occurs automatically unless the Tow Haul mode is enabled Upshifts into both overdrive gears 5th and 6th will be delayed when the transmission fluid temperature is below 40 F 4 5 C or above 240 F 115 5 C NOTE Use caution when operating a heavily loaded vehicle in 2nd or 1st gear in high ambients as torque converter slip can impose significant additional heat load on the cooling system WARNING Never use Park position on an automatic transmis sion as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage 288 STARTING AND OPERATING M Overdrive Operation The overdrive automatic transmission contains an
305. omotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part which has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations NEE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 477 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 6 7L TURBO DIESEL CAUTION Failure to perform the reguired maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle At Each Stop for Fuel Check the engine oil level about 30 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade performance Once a Month Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage Inspect the batteries and clean and tighten the termi nals as required Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder and transmission and transfer case if equipped add as needed Check Filter Minder Replace air cleaner filter element if necessary Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct operation M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Drain water from the fuel filter M A l N T E N A N C E S C
306. on roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle WINDOWS Power Windows If Equipped Power Window Switches The control on the left front door panel has up down switches that give you fingertip control of all power windows There is a single opening and closing switch on the front passenger door for passenger window control 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE and on the rear doors of Ouad Cab and Mega Cab models The windows will operate only when the igni tion switch is turned to the ON or ACC Accessory position WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Auto Down Driver s Side Only The driver s window switch has an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the detent release and the window will go down automatically Window Lockout Switch 4 Door Models Only The window lockout switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the window lock button To enable the window controls press the window control button again Window Lockout Switch NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE
307. onents The 4 wheel drive light 4WD located in the instrument cluster alerts the driver that the vehicle is in 4 wheel drive and that the front and rear driveshafts are locked together This light illuminates when the transfer case is shifted to either the 4H or 4L positions There is no light for the 2H or N Neutral positions When operating your vehicle in 4L the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of 4 wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference will adversely affect shifting and can cause damage to the transfer case NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning The transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take place Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case Because 4 wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit NOTE Delayed shifts out of four wheel drive may be experienced due to uneven tire wear low or uneven tire pressures excessive vehicle loading or cold tempera tures 296 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING You o
308. onsump tion 3 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on the face of the driver s door or on the driver s side B pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual 811adOdO Tire Placard Location The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to en STARTING AND OPERATING 325 check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km
309. or vents depend ing on the selected mode panel vs bi level GED 2 811b86ba NOTE Selecting a Recirculation Mode mode does not necessarily consume more fuel than normal A C mode Panel 4 Outside air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Bi Level gt e Outside air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel and at the floor Floor 2 Outside air flows primarily through the floor out lets located under the instrument panel Mix tipe Outside air flows in equal proportions through the x floor and defroster outlets and the air conditioning may be on Defrost W Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield through the defroster outlets located at the base of the windshield and the demister outlets located at the edge of each side of the instrument panel and the air conditioning may be on NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the A C button has not been pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield Blower Control g The rotary knob on the left of the o E control panel is the blower control Turn the knob clockwise to one of the four positions to obtain the blower speed you desire To turn the blower off turn the knob to the far left posi tion 816463cd NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 Temperature Control T
310. orages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchor ages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or lap shoulder belt They will also have tether straps and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle NOTE If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com patible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belt Installing the Child Restraint System WARNING Do not install child restraint
311. ormation Soft Soft Turn the tune knob to select the following format types Nostalgia Nostalgia 16 Digit Character Jazz Jazz Program Type Display Classical Classical No program type or un None Rhythm and Blues Rhythm_and_Blues defined Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B News News Foreign Language Foreign Language Information Information Religious Music Religious Music Sports Sports Religious Talk Religious Talk Talk Talk Personality Personality Rock Rock Public Public Classic Rock Classic Rock College College Adult Hits Adult Hits Unassigned Soft Rock Soft Rock Weather Weather Top 40 Top 40 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next freguency station with the same selected PTY name The PTY function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the PTY Program Type mode the PTY mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station NOTE If you have selected a PTY with the tune knob simply pressing the tune button in will go directly to a PTY seek Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations Operating Instructions Tape Player Insert the cassette with
312. ost heat after start cycle is complete the manifold heaters will shut off e If the engine is started before the WAIT TO START light turns off the preheat cycle will turn off If the engine is cranked for more than 10 seconds the post heat cycle will turn off 274 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE Engine idle speed will automatically increase to 3 Start the engine using the Normal Starting Procedure 1000 rpm at low coolant temperatures to improve engine warm up NOTE When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of WARNING fuel or the fuel gels at low temperatures air is pulled into 4 Repeat the procedure if the engine does not start the fuel system Do not open the high pressure fuel system when uu cranking the engine or with the engine running You may try priming as described below Engine operation causes high fuel pressure High 1 Add a substantial quantity of fuel to the tank 5 to 10 pressure fuel spray can cause serious injury or death gallons or eliminate the gelled fuel condition 2 Crank the engine for 1 to 2 seconds If the engine does NOTE The engine may run rough until the air is forced not start then release the key or starter button back to the from all the fuel lines RUN position do not turn the key back to the OFF position The electric fuel transfer pump will continue to run and purge air from the system for about 20 seconds After 20 seconds attempt to start the engine again NEE STA
313. ot load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 6500 LBS or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to mm lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle FRONT CURB 2153 REAR CURB 1458 FRONT LOAD 423 REARLOAD 1466 An EXAMPLE of a loaded vehicle is shown in the FRONT WEIGHT 2576 REAR WEIGHT 2924 following chart Note that neither GVWR nor GAWR LOADED LOADED GAWR FRONT 3600 GAWR REAR 3900 capabilities are exceeded Overloading can cause poten tial safety hazards and shorten service life TOTAL LOADED WEIGHT 5500 LBS 81200425 350 STARTING AND OPERATING M TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully re view this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the reguirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weig
314. our dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings for the website address that contains the necessary information for your specific drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Class Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg Class I Light Duty Class II Medium Duty Class III Heavy Duty Class IV Extra 5 000 Ibs 2268 kg 10 000 Ibs 4540 kg Heavy Duty Fifth Wheel Greater than 10 000 Ibs Gooseneck 4540 kg All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings NOTE For additional trailer towing information maxi mum trailer weight ratings refer to the following website addresses e http www dodge com towing e http www dodge ca Canada Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer
315. out of overdrive NOTE If the vehicle has not been driven in several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This condition is normal and will not cause damage to the transmission The torque converter will refill within five seconds of shifting from Park into any other gear position Out of Park Sense Alarm If Equipped Vehicles equipped with a Diesel Engine and a Automatic Transmission may be equipped with an Alarm that warns the customer upon exiting the vehicle that the transmis sion is not in the Park position This feature will only be functional under following conditions e engine running foot off the brake pedal e driver s seat belt is unbuckled e driver s door is open When this feature is triggered the horn will sound the high beams and turn signal lamps will flash and the PRNDL position will flash This will continue until one of the following conditions is met e engine is turned off e transmission is in Park e driver s seat belt is buckled brakes applied The alarm will continue for 3 minutes if the driver s door is closed but none of the other conditions listed above are met 292 STARTING AND OPERATING Sx MANUAL TRANSMISSION WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking
316. ow tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to over heat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires o
317. own on the Maintenance Schedules the system should be drained flushed and refilled If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old antifreeze solution Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct coolant type NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431 CAUTION Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT en gine coolants may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection If a non HOAT coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emer gency it should be replaced with the specified cool ant as soon as possible Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based coolants Use of Propylene Glycol based coolants is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals This coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100 000 miles before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use t
318. p Stating esse ones bias ede cates ts 391 Key Programming ese ee ee ee ee ee ee ipi 17 Key Replacement ee EES EE EE ee ee i 16 Key Sentry Immobilizer llle 15 Keyless Entry System ee ee ee es ee ee 21 Keys ER ee ee ead oe Cage ea DE 12 Knee Bolster iu ose 520 Rae RR SERE bade er pn 47 Lane Change and Turn Signals 135 Lap Belts 2 44 424 244 0600 89h3 2 awd ERR naed 44 Lap Shoulder Belts 000 35 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 65 Lite Of Tires 4 9 sedi danas che EE aie ES 329 Lights u ER OE OE OE OR alk 78 130 ide vo EE EE EE EE 58 190 Anti Lock Warning EE EE Ee 195 313 Brake Warning oes ka Ee SE EE eee 194 Bulb Replacement EE EE EE EE Ee 457 Cap Top Clearance ss sna saora ko 0 000 000 05 466 so eis Soar neg oo e iet ace s 134 Center Mounted Stop ie ee EE EE EE 464 Check Engine Malfunction Indicator 194 SII IM 199 Daytime Running oes EE Ee i man eens 133 Bu sues beue EE ed N 144 Dual Wheel Assembly Rear 467 RE tio ete IUS d ane s 134 193 461 Four Wheel Drive Indicator 298 Hazard Warning Flasher lisse 378 Headlights ass pues prd RD pete eed 132 High Beam ese oe mm Ro RR 136 190 High Beam Indicator llle 190 High Beam Low Beam Select 136 Illuminated Entry e c pin c e Rs 20 Instrument Cluster EE EE EE ere Eey 189 Intensity
319. pairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers i de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well ipso Cate packaged and sealed e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel en MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449 e Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as possible Your dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use Mopar Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabra sive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only Mopar cleaners are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure If equipped YES Essentials seats may be cleaned in the following manner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel
320. partment near the battery This center contains car tridge fuses and mini fuses A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart 452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 1 20 Amp Power Outlet Console 9 30 Amp Off Road Module Yellow Pink Power 2 20 Amp Cabin Compartment 10 5 Amp Trx Off Rd Pkg Sen Yellow Node CCN Door Orange Gas Engine Only Locks NOTE Insert 5 amp 3 m fuse in this cavity to ae NEL ble the TRX capa 4 15 Amp Aisin Transmission ene p Blue Controls Diesel Only T UE natty at Equipped mp gnition raw 5 20 Amp Power Sunroof Yellow JOD Cabin Com Yellow partment Node 6 10 Amp Vistronic Fan CCN Radio Under Red Wastegate Solenoid Hood Lamp Wireless 7 Control Module 8 10 Amp Heated Mirrors WCM Satellite Digi Red tal Audio Receiver SDARS Hands Free Module HFM EOM NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 12 30 Amp Electric Brake 20 10 Amp Occupant Restraints Pink Red Controller ORC 2 13 25 Amp Power Battery 21 10 Amp Occupant Restraint
321. pecifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi cle s GVWR 348 STARTING AND OPERATING NNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE Tire Size The tire size on the Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and
322. pin on cooler filter if equipped If your vehicle is used for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing gt x lt Change manual transmission fluid en MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 483 Miles Kilometers Months 45 000 72 000 36 52 500 84 000 42 60 000 97 000 48 67 500 109 000 54 75 000 121 000 60 Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months if not replaced at 100 000 miles 160 000 km Inspect drive belt replace as necessary Replace fuel filter element Inspect brake linings Inspect fan hub gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt Inspect and adjust parking brake if necessary X Inspect damper Inspect front wheel bearings gt lt Ps gt lt Replace Crankcase Ventilation Filter CCV Clean EGR Valve Clean EGR Cooler 2X gt lt M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 484 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME Miles 82 500 90 000 97 500 100 000 105 000 Kilometers 133 000 145 000 157 000 160 000 169 000 Months 66 72 78 84 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting 4X4 X X X X Rotate tires X X X X T tire for proper pressure and correct X X X X Lubricate outer tie rod end
323. place Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button If the channel has been trained the EVIC display will now state CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the EVIC display still states CHANNEL TRAIN ING repeat Step 3 NOTE After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the learn or training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open amp close the door 81c4849d 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button 6 Firmly press and release the learn or training button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the Learn button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for 2 sec onds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate
324. possible burst failure Clutch Linkage If the clutch pedal linkage begins to squeak or grunt the clutch pedal pivot bushings should be lubricated Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the correct lubricant type Multipurpose Grease NLGI Grade 2 E P Clutch Hydraulic System The clutch hydraulic system is a sealed maintenance free system In the event of leakage or other malfunction the system must be replaced Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level For Model 9 25 Front Axles and 10 5 11 5 Rear Axles refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the correct lubricant type For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not required When the vehicle is ser viced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected When checking the fluid level the vehicle should be in a level position The fluid level should be 1 4 1 4 6 4 mm 4 6 4 mm below the fill hole on the 9 25 Front Axle The fluid level should be 3 4 1 4 19 mm 6 4 mm below the fill hole on all 10 5 and 1 4 1 4 6 4 mm 4 6 4 mm on 11 5 Rear Axles Drain And Refill Follow the Maintenance Schedule for recommended fron and rear axle fluid change intervals NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439 Lubricant Selection Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the correct lubricant type NOTE The presence of water in the gear lubricant will result in corrosion and possible failure of dif
325. pped 85 Operation sula ei dee BST ee RET 91 Outside Mirrors 0 0000 e ee eee 85 FHORE a iui dar sense ate cp 28 Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature 86 ee ET wee eas 2n Electronic Power Mirrors If Equipped 86 HiNaHEed Phone Corne quitas iis 108 Electric Rear Window Defroster And Heated Ub eg iin ei EM 107 Sideview Mirrors If Equipped 87 Trailer Towing Mirrors If Equipped 87 General Information 116 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEE EE EE EE eee 116 Headlamp Delay 2 ii See SE ES see ee 132 40 20 40 Front Seat 0 00000 aa 117 Headlights Parking Lights Panel Lights 132 Reclining Seats ea gc cape eae erage bag ces 118 Daytime Running Lights Canada Only And Adjustable Head Restraints 119 Fleet Vehicles 2 2 3 6 nde EE DE eme ex 133 Manual Rotary Lumbar Support Adjustment Lights On Reminder iss e er kes 134 If Equipped ss one ke e e en 120 Fog Lights If Equipped 134 Power Seats If Equipped 120 Cargo Light If Equipped 134 Rear Seat Features Mega Cab Models 122 Multifunction Control Lever l i 135 Heated Seats If Equipped 127 W Windshield Wipers And Washers 137 H To Open And C
326. preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a DaimlerChrysler Corporation product 3 Reguested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise reguired by law Data Parameters that May Be Recorded Diagnostic trouble code s and warning lamp status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system Airbag disable lamp status if equipped Time of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable Impact acceleration and angle Seatbelt status Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed Engine control status including engine speed Transmission gear selection Cruise control status es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 e Traction stability control status WARNING e Tire pressure monitoring system status if equipped Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time babies and children too Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap can become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured
327. press the button a third time for 2 seconds to complete the training If you are have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEE Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The EVIC display will change from CHANNEL TRAIN ING to CHANNEL TRAINED If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed
328. quipment installed by van conversion camper manufacturers body builders See the Warranty information book Section 2 1 C Such equipment includes video monitors VCRs heaters stoves refrigerators etc For warranty coverage and service on these items contact the applicable manufac turer Operating instructions for the special equipment in stalled by the conversion camper manufacturer should fj also be supplied with your vehicle If these instructions are missing please contact your selling dealer for assis tance in obtaining replacement documents from the applicable manufacturer For information on the Body Builders Guide go to www dodgebodybuilder com This website contains di mensional and technical specifications for your vehicle It is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer s technical support For service issues contact your dealer 8 INTRODUCTION EBENEN VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER NOTE It is illegal to remove the VIN The vehicle identification number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS the windshield This number also appears on the Auto mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window WARNING on your vehicle the vehicle registration and title Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death
329. r Opener to complete the training for Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you are have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEE General Information This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi cations were met POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console NOTE The Power Accessory Delay feature will allow the power sunroof to operate for ten minutes after the ignition is turned off NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 WARNING Open Sunroof Express Mode i Momentarily pressing the switch rearward will activa
330. r axle fluid 4X4 X X X NEE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 487 Miles 112 500 120 000 127 500 135 000 142 500 150 000 Kilometers 181 000 193 000 205 000 217 000 229 000 241 000 Months 90 96 102 108 114 120 Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid and change main sump filter and spin on X X cooler filter if equipped M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Change manual transmission fluid X Inspect fan hub X X Inspect damper X X Replace fuel filter element X X X Inspect front wheel bearings X X Inspect brake linings X X Inspect and adjust parking brake if necessary X X Adjust valve lash clearance X Replace Crankcase Ventilation Filter CCV X Clean the EGR Valve X Clean the EGR Cooler X 488 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Sx Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all re ceipts You can be badly injured working on or around a This maintenance is not required if belt was previously motor vehicle Do only that service work for which replaced you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic The EGR Valve and EGR Cooler maintenance will be covered by the manufacturer only at this maintenanc
331. r dialed from the UConnect system Call Continuation Call continuation is progression of a phone call on UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to off Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After ignition key is switched off a call can continue on the UConnect system either until the call ends or NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone After ignition key is switched to off a call can continue on the UConnect system for certain duration after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off UConnect System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect system is using e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais if so equipped e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete m language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every UConnect language change op eration only the language specif
332. r is left ajar for 10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated upwards for 10 minutes the interior lights will automatically turn off If the headlamps remain on while the ignition is cycled off the exterior lights will automatically turn off after 8 minutes If the headlamps are turned on and left on for 8 minutes while the ignition is off the exterior lights will automatically turn off NOTE Battery Saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is ON Headlamp Delay To aid in your exit your vehicle is equipped with a headlamp delay that will leave the headlamps on for 90 seconds This delay is initiated when the ignition is turned OFF while the headlamp switch is on and then the headlamp switch is cycled off Headlamp delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlamp switch ON then OFF or by turning the ignition ON Headlights Parking Lights Panel Lights xD When the headlight switch is rotated to the first position the parking lights taillights side marker lights license plate light and instrument panel lights are all turned on The headlights will turn ON when the switch is rotated to the second position T en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 81482f22 Light Switch Rotation Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning proce
333. r others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the Neutral N position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case Neutral N position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2H Rear Wheel Drive High Range Normal street and highway driving Dry hard surfaced roads 4H 4 Wheel Drive High Range Locks the front and rear driveshafts together Forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only N Neutral Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle See Recreational Towing for more infor mation 4L 4 Wheel Drive Low Range Low speed 4 wheel drive Locks the front and rear driveshafts together Forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 297 Shifting Procedure Manually Shifted Transfer Case Manual Transfer Case Shifter 2H amp 4H Shifting between 2H and
334. r the weight of the load to the pickup box floor or vehicle damage may result The use of proper supports will permit loading up to the rated payload Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in an accident causing serious or fatal injury There are stampings in the sheet metal on the inner side bulkheads of the box in front of and behind both wheel housings Place wooden boards across the box from side to side to create separate load compartments in the pickup box There are four tie down cleats bolted to the lower sides of the pickup box that can sustain loads up to 1000 Ibs 450 kg total SLIDE IN CAMPERS Camper Applications Certain truck models are not recommended for slide in campers To determine if your vehicle is excluded please refer to the Consumer Information Truck Camper Load ing document available from your dealer For safety reasons follow all instructions in this important docu ment NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 NOTE When a cap or pickup camper is installed on a vehicle an alternate CHMSL Center High Mounted Stop Light must be provided EASY OFF TAILGATE To simplify mounting of a camper unit with an overhang the tailgate can be removed quickly If the truck is a 3500 dual rear wheel model unplug the tailgate wire harness from under the rear of the truck and pull the harness out of the cargo box access hole Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support cables by releasing
335. r wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNNENEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original eguipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size eguipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement eguipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 26 Transmission Oil Temperature Warning Light Automatic Transmissions Only This light indicates that there is excessive trans mission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing It may also occur when operating the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condition such as 4 wheel drive operation e g snow plowing off road operation If this light comes on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light goes off 27 Wait To Start Indicator The Wait To Start Indicator will illuminate when the ignition is turned to the run position and the intake manifold temperature is below 66 degrees F Follow engine starting procedure for proper
336. racks or loose clamps resulting in loss of pressure and reduced engine performance Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard or soft spots brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and exces sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect hose routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any heat source or moving component which may cause heat damage or mechanical wear Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present Components should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure 436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx Brake System Power Disc Brakes Front and Rear Disc brakes do not reguire adjustment however several hard stops during the break in period are recommended to seat the linings and wear off any foreign material Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked when performing under the hood service or immedi ately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system failure The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic reservoir On the outboard side of the reservoir there is a FULL
337. radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 15 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names mm e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a mm 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the mp3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the mp3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Specification Frequency kHz Bitrate Mbps 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Lay
338. rank the engine for 1 to 2 seconds If the engine does not start then release the key or starter button back to the RUN position do not tum the key back to the OFF position The electric fuel transfer pump will continue to run and purge air from the system for about 20 seconds After 20 seconds attempt to start the engine again 3 Start the engine using the Normal Starting Procedure 4 Repeat the procedure if the engine does not start CAUTION Do not engage the starter motor for more than 15 seconds at a time Allow two minutes between the cranking intervals NOTE The engine may run rough until the air is forced from all the fuel lines NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 347 VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration Regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or pillar This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the Month Day and Hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options and cargo The label also s
339. rase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds The EVIC will display CLEARING CHAN NELS Release the buttons when the EVIC message states CHANNELS CLEARED It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage while training 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 3 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 3 8 cm from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the EVIC display in view For optimal training point the battery end of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED Then release both the HomeLink and hand held trans mitter buttons 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEE If the EVIC display states DID NOT TRAIN repeat Step 3 If the signal is too weak replace the battery in the original hand held transmitter It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open amp close while you train NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to re
340. rating Tips Fast Cooldown For a fast cooldown turn the blower fan rotary knob to the extreme right position turn the mode control to the panel fresh position press the snowflake button to turn on the air conditioning and drive with the windows open for the first few minutes Once the hot air has been expelled close the windows and press the recirculation push button on dual zone control or switch the mode from panel fresh to panel recirculate on single zone control When a comfortable condition has been reached choose a mode position and adjust the temperature control slide and blower speed as necessary to maintain comfort For high humidity conditions it may be neces sary to remain in the Recirculation mode to maintain comfort NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it s rainy or humid In most cases turning on the Air conditioning pressing the snowflake button will clear the fog Adjust the temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield by using MIX Mode position on the control Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the defrost
341. rating conditions as outlined in the Selection of Engine Oil Cummins Turbo Diesel Fill the engine with the correct grade of new oil The engine capacity is 11 quarts 10 4 liters in the crankcase and 1 quart 95 liter in the lubricating oil filter 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Start the engine and operate it at idle for several minutes Check for leaks at the lubricating oil filter and oil pan drain plug Run the engine until it has reached operating tempera ture stop the engine Wait approximately 15 minutes to let the oil in the upper parts of the engine drain back to the pan Check the oil level again Add oil as necessary to bring the level to the SAFE mark on the dipstick Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Filter Care should be taken in disposing of the used engine fluids from your vehicle Used fluids indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your local dealer service station or governmen tal agency for advice on recycling programs and where used fluids and filters can be safely discarded in your area Drive Belt Inspection Check the belt for intersecting cracks e Transverse across the belt width cracks are accept able e Longitudinal direction of belt length cracks that intersect with transverse cracks are NOT acceptable Replace the belt if it has unacceptable cracks is frayed or has pieces of material missing The engine speed sensor located near t
342. rd to a ground fault interrupter protected 110 115 volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire exten sion cord The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood to the right side and can be located just behind the grille near the headlamp NOTE The engine block heater cord is a factory in stalled option If your vehicle is not equipped heater cords are available from your authorized Mopar dealer The block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the coolant WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 volt electrical cord could cause electrocution 278 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE The block heater will require 110 Volts AC and 6 5 Amps to activate the heater element Block Heater Usage A Temperatures below 0 F 18 C e Block Heater Required for 15W 40 e Block Heater Recommended for 5W 40 B Temperatures below 20 F 29 C e Block Heater Required for 5W 40 Winter Front Usage If a winter front or cold weather cover is to be used a percentage of the total grille opening area must be left uncovered to provide sufficient air flow to the charge air cooler and automatic transmission oil cooler The per centage of opening must be increased with the increasing ambient air temperature and or engine load If the cooling fan can be heard cycling frequently increase the size of the opening in the winter front A suitable
343. rded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 15 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names E mm e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension mm e Level 2 31 including a separator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the mp3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the mp3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3
344. re indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra Load or Reinforced Tire Light Load Light Load Tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 318 STARTING AND OPERATING M Tire Identification Number TIN located on the white sidewall side of the tire Look for the The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted however the date code may only be on one side Tires with on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side white sidewalls will have the full TIN including date code then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location 2 digits L9 Code representing the tire size 2 digits ABCD Code used by tire manufacturer 1 to 4 digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which
345. rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving STARTING AND OPERATING 349 Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect NOTE The weights shown in this chart are not on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way necessarily the weights for your vehicle Also the the brakes operate amount of load added to both the front and rear axles can be computed after the vehicle has been weighed CAUTION both in its curb weight condition and in its loaded and ready for operation condition Do n
346. rear seat or in the front seat if the passenger s front airbag is Off If the airbag is left On a rearward facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child restraint Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it The passenger seat belts are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull on the belt until it is all removed from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess web bing to tighten the lap portio
347. recommended engine oil viscos ity for your vehicle Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oil The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi tion of any additives other than leak detection dyes or lube odorants to the engine oil Engine oil is an engi neered product and it s performance may be impaired by supplemental additives NOTE The manufacturer offers a lube odorant Mopar Diesel Fresh for diesel engines crankcases The lube odorant is recommended by the manufacturer to reduce the sulfur smell that may occur during engine idling 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Oil Filter Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the correct part number The engine oil filter should be changed at every engine oil change Engine Oil And Filter Change Operate the engine until the coolant temperature reaches 140 F 60 C Shut the engine off Remove the oil drain plug Use a container that can hold at least 12 quarts 11 3 Liters to hold the used oil Always check the condition of the used oil This can give you an indication of some engine problems that might exist e Thin black oil indicates fuel dilution e Milky discoloration indicates coolant dilution Clean the area around the oil filter base Remove the
348. res may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged oversized or have theft protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the operation of a cellular phone in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy perfor mance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repo sitioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CLIMATE CONTROLS Heater Only If Equipped The controls for the heating and ventilation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions 81646397 Manual Heating Controls A f a The mode control at the right of the lie control panel can be set in any of the S following positions 8164639b Climate Control Location 816463c5 NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 NOTE To improve your selection choices the system allows you to operate at intermediate positions between the major modes These intermediate positions are iden tified by the small dots Panel Outside air
349. ridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches BACK VIEW OF STEERING WHEEL 8147b025 Remote Sound System Controls The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a button in the center Pressing the top of the switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the switch will decrease the volume The center button of the right hand control will allow you to change the mode NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the left side switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next pre set station that you have programmed in the radio pre set push buttons Tape Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next selection on the cassette Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the
350. rt the engine 5 Within 30 seconds press the driver s door lock switch in the UNLOCK direction 6 A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has been changed 7 Repeat the above steps to alternate the availability of this feature 8 If a chime is not heard program mode was canceled before the feature could be changed If necessary repeat the above procedure 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE Child Protection Door Lock To use the system open each rear door slide the lever UP To provide a safer environment for children riding in the to engage the locks and DOWN to disengage the child rear seat the rear doors of your vehicle have the child protection locks When the system on a door is engaged protection door lock system that door can only be opened by using the outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position Child Protection Door Lock Location Child Lock Control NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged NOTE After setting the child protection door lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK positi
351. rubber mallet When replacing the hub caps tilt the cap retainer over the lugnut bolt circle and strike the high side down with a rubber mallet Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins are firmly seated around the wheel 8 Stud Dual Rear Wheels Dual wheels are flat mounted center piloted The lug nuts are a two piece assembly When the tires are being rotated or replaced clean these lug nuts and add 2 drops of oil at the interface between the hex and the washer 388 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 802d4b53 Slots in the wheels will assist in properly orienting the inner and outer wheels Align these slots when assem bling the wheels for best access to the tire valve on the inner wheel The tires of both dual wheels must be completely off the ground when tightening to insure wheel centering and maximum wheel clamping Dual wheel models require a special heavy duty lug nut tightening adapter included with the vehicle to cor rectly tighten the lug nuts Also when it is necessary to remove and install dual rear wheels use a proper vehicle lifting device NOTE When installing a spare tire as part of a dual rear wheel end combination the tire diameter of the two individual tires must be compared If there is a significant difference the larger tire should be installed in a front location Correct direction of rotation for dual tire instal lations must also be observed These dual rear wheels should be tightened as
352. ry Key is used to start a vehicle the engine will run for 2 seconds and then the security alarm will be initiated To exit alarming mode press the transmitter Unlock button or start the vehicle with a programmed Sentry Key The Security Alarm System is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will arm unexpectedly If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the transmitter the alarm will sound when you pull the door handle to exit The door will be locked but the Security Alarm will not arm ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the keyless entry transmitter or open the doors This feature is only available if you have Remote Keyless Entry The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned on NOTE e The front courtesy overhead console door courtesy lights do not turn off if the dimmer control is in the interior lights ON position extreme top position NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 e The illuminated entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY IF EQUIPPED 8163e6a8 Three Button Transmitter This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors from distances up to about 23 feet 7 meters using a hand held radio transmitter The transm
353. s Natural RWAL ABS Module Red Pass Disable Switch Feed 22 2 Amp IGN Switch Feed 14 15 Amp Park Lamps Left Gray Blue 23 10 Amp HVAC 15 20 Amp Trailer Park Lamps Red Yellow 24 20 Amp AISIN Relay Feed 16 15 Amp Park Lamps Right Blue Diesel Only Blue 25 10 Amp Power Mirror T Case 17 Red Brake 18 40 Amp ABS Pump 26 20 Amp Brake Switch Center Green Yellow High Mount Stop 19 30 Amp Trailer Tow Battery Lamp CHMSL Pink Feed Aftermarket CHMSL 454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Yellow Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 27 40 Amp Power Seats 32 10 Amp Power Ignition Run Green Red Adjustable Pedals 28 10 Amp Power Run Start LED Red PCM Steering Angle 33 10 Amp Power IGN Run Sensor Red HVAC 29 10 Amp 4X4 Switch Pass Dr 34 Red Switch EC Mirror 35 15 Amp Cabin Compartment 30 15 Amp Power Run Start Blue Node CCN Illumi Blue ABS RWAL Smart nation Bar YAW Sensor 36 25 Amp Audio Amplifier Universal Exhaust Natural Es pr a ego 37 15 Amp Variable Gate Turbo ae Blue VGT Turbo Die 31 10 Amp PCM Gas TCM sel bed ies LAERE 38 20 Amp Power Outlet IP ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description CAUTION Fuse Fuse 39 10 Amp Seatbelt Tension e When installing the Integrated Power Module Red Reducer Power IGN cover
354. s This vehicle is designed to carry passengers in the cab only For safety reasons NEVER TRANSPORT PASSEN GERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE Lock Your Vehicle Always remove the keys from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended even in your own driveway or garage Try to park your vehicle in a well lighted area and never invite theft by leaving ar ticles of value exposed Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide a potentially toxic gas that by itself is colorless and odorless To avoid inhaling these gases the following precautions should be observed e Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area e If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for more than a short period adjust your climate control system to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed and the controls in any position except OF
355. s 4 Reverse the procedure to put the load floor back in the secured down position before you operate the vehicle en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 PICKUP BOX NOTE If you are installing a toolbox to the front of the pickup box you must use Mopar toolbox brackets available from your dealer You can carry wide building materials sheets of ply wood etc by building a raised load floor Place lumber B across the box in the indentations provided above the wheel housings and in the bulkhead dividers to form the BULK HEAD DIVIDERS floor WARNING The pickup box is intended for load carrying pur poses only not for passengers who should sit in Pickup Box Features seats and use seat belts The pickup box on your new Ram has many features designed for utility and convenience 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEE WARNING e Care should always be exercised when operating a vehicle with unrestrained cargo Vehicle speeds may need to be reduced Severe turns or rough roads may cause shifting or bouncing of the cargo that may result in vehicle damage If wide build ing materials are to be frequently carried the installation of a support is recommended This will restrain the cargo and transfer the load to the pickup box floor If you wish to carry more than 600 lbs 272 kg of material suspended above the wheelhouse sup ports must be installed to transfe
356. s X X X X Se replace engine coolant if not replaced at X Check transfer case fluid level 4X4 X NEE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 485 Miles 82 500 90 000 97 500 100 000 105 000 Kilometers 133 000 145 000 157 000 160 000 169 000 Months 66 72 78 84 Change front and rear axle fluid 4X4 X X Inspect drive belt replace as required X X Inspect fan hub X Inspect damper X Replace fuel filter element X X Inspect front wheel bearings X Inspect brake linings X X Inspect and adjust parking brake if necessary X X M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 486 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEE ed Miles 112 500 120 000 127 500 135 000 142 500 150 000 L Kilometers 181 000 193 000 205 000 217 000 229 000 241 000 m Months 90 96 102 108 114 120 A Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X ad Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting 4X4 X X X X X X EE Rotate tires X X X x X X arp da i for proper pressure and cor X X X X X X Lubricate outer tie rod ends X X X X X X DE Flush and replace engine coolant at 120 ME months if not replaced at 100 000 miles 161 X E 000 km tM Inspect drive belt replace as required X X X hg Drain and refill transfer case fluid 4X4 X Check transfer case fluid level 4X4 X Change front and rea
357. s in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from acciden tally locking your keys in the vehicle Removing the key or closing the door will allow the locks to operate A chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and a door is open as a reminder to remove the key Automatic Door Locks If Equipped If this feature is enabled your door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph Automatic Door Lock Programming This feature is enabled when your vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant and can be disabled by using the following procedure e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 3 of this manual for details 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC performing the following procedure 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seat belt will cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this programming procedure 3 Place the key into the ignition 4 Within 15 seconds cycle the key from the LOCK position to the ON RUN position a minimum of four times ending in the LOCK position do not start the engine 5 Within 30 seconds press t
358. s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEE Storage and Seats Quad Cab Models Located in the center of the front 40 20 40 seat cushion there is a storage compartment Standard cab models also have storage behind the seat The Quad Cab models provide additional storage under the rear seat Lift the seat to access the storage compart ment Quad Cab Storage Storage and Seats Mega Cab Models The Mega Cab models provide additional storage behind the rear seat en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 To gain access to the Mega Cab rear storage fold the rear The rear storage compartment can be divided into three seats to the kneel position See page 124 for more separate compartments by using the divider doors inside information the storage comp
359. s dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure e Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems You could lose control of your vehicle e Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure 324 STARTING AND OPERATING M 2 Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel c
360. s the increased engine braking can cause the rear wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle control which may cause an accident possi bly resulting in personal injury or death NOTE For optimum braking power it is recommended to use the Exhaust Brake while in Tow Haul Mode The purpose of the exhaust brake engine braking fea ture is to supply negative braking torgue to the engine Typically the engine braking is used for but not limited to vehicle towing applications where vehicle braking can be achieved by the internal engine power thereby spar ing the mechanical brakes of the vehicle NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 285 Benefits of the exhaust brake are e vehicle driving control e reduced brake fade e longer brake life e faster cab warm up The exhaust brake feature can also be used to reduce the engine warm up time To use the exhaust brake as a warm up device the vehicle must be moving less than 5 MPH the exhaust brake switch must be in the on position and the coolant temperature must below 180 F and ambient temperature below 60 F TRANSMISSION SHIFTING Automatic Transmission with Overdrive 68RFE If Equipped The gear shift selector display located in the instrument panel cluster indicates the transmission gear range the selector is illuminated for night driving The selector lever is mounted on the right side of the steering column You must depress the br
361. se with your Cummins Diesel equipped vehicle NOTE In addition commercially available fuel addi tives are not necessary for the proper operation of your Cummins Diesel equipped vehicle Intervention Regeneration Strategy EVIC Message Process Flow Catalyst Full Message 6 7L Diesel Engines Only Your new Cummins 6 7L diesel meets all EPA Heavy Duty Diesel Engine Emissions Standards resulting in the lowest emitting diesel engine ever produced To achieve these emission standards your vehicle is equipped with state of the art engine and exhaust system The engine and exhaust aftertreatment system work together to achieve the EPA Heavy Duty Diesel Engine Emissions Standards These systems are seamlessly inte grated into your vehicle and managed by the Cummins 6 7L engine Powertrain Control Module PCM The PCM WW manages engine combustion to allow the exhaust sys tem s catalyst to trap and burn Particulate Matter PM pollutants with no input or interaction on your part 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Additionally the overhead console in your vehicle has the ability to alert you to additional maintenance re quired on your truck or engine Refer to the following messages that may be displayed on your Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust sys
362. se Control Switch Switch 2 Air Outlets 7 Glove Box 12 Power Sliding Back Glass 17 Parking Brake Release Lever Switch 3 Instrument Cluster 8 Passenger Airbag 13 Cup Holders 18 Adjustable Pedal Control On Off Switch Switch 4 Climate Controls 9 Power Outlet 14 Exhaust Brake Switch If Equipped 5 Radio 10 Heated Seat Switch 15 Cigar Lighter 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER Instrument Cluster 6 7L Diesel Engine CHECK GAGES G CRUISE a WS 81c3c752 NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION 1 Check Gages check This light illuminates when the Voltmeter Engine Oil Pressure or Engine Coolant Temperature gages indicate a reading either too high or too low Examine the gages carefully and follow the instructions contained below for each indicated problem NOTE When the ignition switch is turned to OFF the Fuel Gage Voltmeter Oil Pressure and Engine Coolant Temperature gages may not show accurate readings When the engine is not running turn the ignition switch to ON to obtain accurate readings 2 Voltmeter When the engine is running the gauge indicates the electrical system voltage The pointer should stay within the normal range if the battery is charged If the pointer moves
363. sed on the country in which the ve hicle was purchased the UConnect limits the user from dialing invalid combination of numbers For example in USA 234 567 890 is nine digits long which is not a valid USA phone number the closest valid phone number has ten digits 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNENEEEEEEE The UConnect system will confirm the phone num ber and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call System will prompt you to say the name of the person you want call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the UConnect phone book Refer to Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook to learn how to store a name in the phone book e The UConnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to phone book is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long
364. sponding number where LOAD the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal LOAD Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the LOAD EJT button for 5 seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CD s in the radio the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout If the CD is removed and there are no other CD s in the radio the radio will remain in CD mode and display INSERT DISC for 10 seconds If no discs are inserted within 10 seconds NO DISCS LOADED will be dis played On some vehicles a disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE TIME Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner TUNE Control CD MODE for CD Audio Play Pressing the TUNE control allows the
365. ss and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to lock all doors If the ignition is OFF when the doors are locked the parking lights will flash on once and the horn will chirp once e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 3 of this manual for details e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure The horn chirp feature will be shipped from the assembly plants activated If desired this feature can be disabled by using the following procedure NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 1 Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle 2 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed i e functional key fob 3 Continue to hold the LOCK button wait at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the PANIC button Release both buttons at the same time 4 To reactivate this feature repeat the above steps Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with the park lamp flash feature activated If desired this feature can be disabled by using the following procedure e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features
366. st comfortable position WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SS Reclining Seats 1 The recliner handle is on the outside of the seat cushion WARNING Pull up on the handle as shown to release the seat back You can be seriously even fatally injured riding in a and adjust for comfort seat with the seatback reclined Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest If you ride in this position the shoulder harness will no longer be restraining you In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and receive serious or fatal injuries Recline in a seat only when the vehicle is parked Manual Recline Lever NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Adjustable Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of neck injury in the event of impact from the rear Pull up or push down on the restraints so that the upper edge is as high as practical at least to the level of the ears To lower the head restraint push in the button and then push down on the head restraint Head Restraints 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEE Manual
367. still function with some loss of overall braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application greater pedal force required to slow or stop and activa tion of the BRAKE warning lamp and the ABS lamp if equipped during brake use Brake Noise During normal operation of the brake system certain noises may be present from time to time Occasional groan or squeal noises may occur during normal operation of the brake system which may not be indica tive of a problem These noises may be heard at any time the brakes are applied but may be more noticeable during the first few brake applications in the morning Moisture hot or cold temperature dust and or other debris may also contribute to the noise condition Repeated or con tinuous noises during braking may be an indication that the brake linings are worn and in need of replacement 312 STARTING AND OPERATING M Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System WARNING WARNING Anti Lock Brake Systems contain sophisticated elec tronic equipment It may be susceptible to interfer ence caused by improperly installed or high output e Anti lock system ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock br
368. straints Occupant EE EE ee ee see 34 Rotation Tires SS SS ee 334 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 77 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 78 Safety Defects Reporting llle 494 Safety Information Tire ee ees ee Ese ee 315 Safety TIPS ae NEAR RE RE Res togii deve de 75 Satellite Radio ES SE ss see 238 242 Satellite Radio Antenna 005 245 Seat Belt Maintenance 000000 451 Seat Belt Reminder sess 45 Seat Belts i e ER EER d genri nea 34 35 77 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 42 And Pregnant Women 04 46 Child Restraint i se fhe ted RR es eo 61 74 Extender ss sis a nae REX IDEE 46 ErontSeat 2 22 so RR Reed oe TES 35 Pretensioners llle 44 Reminder SS ES SE ees 190 Seats xx pie EEG Wes ead ee ET 116 117 Adjustment 5 iss ee Me urbes tus 116 Ghild Aresen EE ED DEE DR uS a Ss 74 Cleaning an GER AR em BAR ec don d ne eee 449 Folding Floor essek Gaede Repente 176 Heated 14 a Race OO PERRA tp 127 Lumbar Support sectes ae tee d iag ESSE 120 POWEL lt 2 decor wae AA OE ER HON 120 Rear Folding ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 122 124 NENNEN INDEX 513 R elining cs meses ARE Di AE 118 Reclining Rear 6 EE EE EE eee 122 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 19 192 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 430 471 Sentry Key Immobilizer 0 15 Sentry Ke
369. swer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell phone Press the Phone button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only either answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently in a call press the Voice Recognition button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phone book entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls To combine two calls refer to Conference Call Place Retrieve a Call from Hold To put a call on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the
370. t H Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 05 ll Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped N Towing A Disabled Vehicle 4 Wheel Drive Vehicles 396 2 Wheel Drive Vehicles 397 378 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EAE HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning switch is mounted on the top of the steering column as shown in the illustration T He e Hazard Light Warning Switch To engage the Hazard Warning lights depress the button on the top of the steering column When the Hazard Warning switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash off and on to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Push the button a second time to turn off the flashers This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning lights will continue to operate even though the ignition switch is OFF NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning lights may discharge your battery NEE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 379 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING All Models If Equipped The jack and jack tools are stored under the front passenger seat Lift the flap on the side of the seat for access e Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
371. t belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the steering wheel The passenger front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity and occupant size This vehicle may also be equipped with window bags to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window If the vehicle is equipped with window bags they are located above the side windows Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEE WARNING e Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer func tional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating If your vehicle is equipped with window bags do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the window bag The area where the window bag is located should rem
372. t in further A ra damage Such damage is not covered by the new vehicle Although your vehicle is capable of driving through limited warranty shallow standing water consider the following before Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to doing so lockup and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the new vehicle limited warranty 308 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING e Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lockup and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you DRIVING OFF ROAD Care should be taken when attempting to climb steep hills or driving diagonally across a hill or slope If natural obstacles force you to travel diagonally up or down a hill choose a mild angle and keep as little side tilt as possible Keep the vehicle moving and make turns slowly and cautiously If you must back down a hill back straight down using
373. t of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 WARNING e The belt positioning booster seat is for children weigh ing more than 40 Ibs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seat back they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Some booster seats are equipped with a front shield and are held in the vehicle by the lap portion For further information refer to www seatcheck org e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a
374. t overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 500 INDEX ME Adding Fuel seed RR EER RE r 344 Adjustable Pedals 00000050 140 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 413 444 Air Conditioner Maintenance 423 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 423 424 Air Conditioning System 252 423 Air Conditioning System Zone Control 256 Air Filter 4 2 rk N ransa RE SERE 413 Air Pressure Tires SS SS ss se 324 332 Airbag 8 RR rie res 3447 54 Airbag Light opress e acre a 58 77 190 Airbag On Off Switch Ee ters 54 Alarm Out of Park Sense l l 291 Alarm Pate 22424 9 3 ere Yr re SRE 24 Alarm Security Alarm 0 19 192 Alarm System Security Alarm 19 Alignment and Balance lesus 331 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Antenna Satellite Radio len 245 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 430 431 Capacities we E hoje s dur 470 Anti Lock Warning Light 195 313 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 19 Anti Theft System 0000000004 19 192 Appearance Care ie nag p ae De s 447 AShtray ae tse hobs RR Od er eo ee 164 Automatic Dimming Mirror 85 Automatic Door Locks 00 0000 e 149 Autom
375. t position Verify that it is locked in place Rear Seat Recliner Handle UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Table Mode Handle Table Mode 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Folding Rear Seat Kneel Mode Mega Cab Models Both the left and right rear seats can be folded flat Kneel Mode and used for carrying cargo Each of the rear seat backs provide 2 D rings and each of the rear storage bin lids provide 2 slotted cutouts Use a cargo tie down to secure cargo in the cargo carrying area Securing Cargo en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 WARNING WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area Cargo must be securely tied down before driving inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people your vehicle Improperly secured cargo can fly riding in these areas are more likely to be seri around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the ously injured or killed vehicle causing serious injury or possible death Secure cargo with a cargo tie down using the D Rings provided on the back of the seats and the slotted cutouts in the rear storage bin lid Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly NOTE The rear seat will drop and move forward in Kneel Mode 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNN
376. t through the center of the wheel STOW TIRE VALVE DOWN 810ae782 It is recommended that you stow the flat or spare to avoid tangling the loose cable es WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 381 NOTE The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack extension tube only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch Tire Changing Procedure WARNING Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Do not raise this vehicle using a bumper jack The jack is designed as a tool for changing tires on this vehicle only It is not recommended that the jack be used for service purposes or to lift more than one wheel at a time Preparations Park the vehicle on a firm level surface avoiding ice or slippery areas Set the parking brake and place the gear selector in PARK automatic transmission or REVERSE manual transmission On four wheel drive vehicles shift the transfer case to the 4L position WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack
377. table and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt etc or if the airbag deployed 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNENEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE Standard Cab Front Center Three Point Belt 1 The front center seat belt on the Standard Cab may be disconnected to open up utilization of the storage areas behind the front seats The black latch plate can be detached from the black keyed seat belt buckle located on the inboard side of the passenger seat Insert the vehicle ignition key into the center white slot on the black buckle The black buckle latch plate can be removed when the key is pressed into the buckle Allow the retractor to take up the surplus webbing and the buckles will hang vertically from the cab back exit bezel thus freeing up all the area behind the front seats Detaching Buckle with Key 2 To reattach the seat belt to the front center seat pull the black buckle latch plate forward from the cab back panel and insert it into the black keyed buckle until there is an audible click Refer to the previous section for the proper seat belt usage NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WARNING e If the black latch and black buckle are not prop erly connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant the seat belt will not be able to provide proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a collision When reattaching the black latch
378. tact the Manufacturer s Customer Center Any communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Dealership name e Vehicle identification number e Vehicle delivery date and mileage DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico 915 729 1248 or 729 1240 Outside Mexico 525 729 1248 or 729 1240 492 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Se Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDDITTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex pected repairs after your manufacturer s new vehicle limited warranty expires The manufacturer stands be hind only the manufacturer s Ser
379. tain prod ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of DaimlerChrysler s warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from your dealer They will help you keep your vehicle operating at its best 494 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Se REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra tion NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http wwwssafercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washing ton DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Cana
380. te the Express Open Feature causing the sunroof to open automatically During the Express Open operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a partial open position Again momentarily pressing the switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle In an accident there is a greater risk of being Closing Sunroof Express thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof could also be seriously injured or killed Always will close automatically from any position The sunroof fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all will close fully and stop automatically This is called passengers are properly secured too Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow fingers or other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEE Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof durin
381. te perchlorate 3 To reassemble the transmitter case snap the two halves of the case together Make sure there is an even gap between the two halves If equipped install and The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 bat tighten the screw until snug Test transmitter operation tery 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ed DOOR LOCKS WARNING Manual Door Locks If Equipped Front and Rear doors may be locked by moving the lock For personal security and safety in the event of an plunger up or down accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as uu well as when you park and leave the vehicle All doors may be opened with the inside door handle without lifting the lock plunger Doors locked before closing will remain locked when closed Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be The ignition key will unlock all the locks on your vehicle seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 Power Door Locks If Equipped A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors jT Power Door Lock Switch Location If you press the power door lock switch while the key i
382. te the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations RIGHT STOP TURN i LEFT FEMALE STOP TURN me PINS PARK aes GND MALE PIN 813262be 4 Pin Connector STARTING AND OPERATING 361 WARNING RUNNING BATTERY LAMPS Any work done to the vehicles electrical system or BACKUP wiring should be performed by a qualified automo LAMPS wee LH tive technician if done improperly it may cause STOP RH damage to the electrical system wiring and could TURN STOP TURN result in serious or fatal injury od ELECTRIC 5 GROUND QE O BRAKES The following chart identifies the maximum electrical N loads that the trailer tow output circuits are capable of supporting 7 Pin Connector 362 STARTING AND OPERATING M Trailer Tow Additional Lamp Loads Output Functions Maximum Current Additional Bulbs Allowed Example Only Other bulb combinations can be used as long as maximum cur rent is not ex ceeded Stop Turn Left 16A 2 3157 bulbs for stop turn Stop Turn Right 16A 2 3157 bulbs for stop turn Trailer Park Lamps 14A 2 1157 bulbs two filament park stop turn plus up to 24 168 or 194 pea nut bulbs Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing all starts must be in FIRST gear
383. tem Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn Perform Service The 6 7L Cummins engine utilizes a Closed Crankcase Ventilation CCV system EGR Valve and a EGR Cooler This system filters and recycles gasses produced in the crankcase during the normal combustion process Per form Service will be displayed on the overhead console of your vehicle if the CCV filter EGR Valve and EGR Cooler is due for required maintenance The CCV filter is located on the top of the engine valve cover For additional information see your local authorized dealer Catalyst Full See Owner Manual Catalyst Full See Owner Manual will be displayed on the overhead console of your vehicle if the exhaust particu late filter reaches 80 of its maximum storage capacity Under conditions of exclusive short duration and low speed driving cycles your Cummins engine and exhaust aftertreatment system may never reach the conditions required to remove the trapped PM if this occurs Cata lyst Full See Owner Manual will be displayed on the overhead console in your vehicle If this message is displayed you will hear one chime to assist in alerting you of this condition NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421 Catalyst Stats 80 Catalyst Stat 80 will replace the message Catalyst Full See Owner Manual after it is displayed for one minute The engine Powertrain Control Module PCM will continu
384. teps 9 and 10 with the transmission in Drive D 12 Shut engine OFF and place ignition key to the unlocked OFF position 13 Shift automatic transmission into Park P 14 Apply parking brake 15 Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar 16 Release parking brake NOTE Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to depressing the Neutral N selection button and must continue to be met until the 4 seconds elapses and the shift has been completed If any of these require ments with the exception of 3 Key ON are not met prior to depressing the Neutral N button or are no longer met during the 4 second timer then the Neutral N indicator light will flash continuously until all re quirements are met or until the Neutral N button is released NOTE The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the key in not ON the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing NOTE Flashing neutral N position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met 374 STARTING AND OPERATING Sx CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans mission is shifted into Park P with the transfer case in Neutral N and the engine RUNNING With the transfer case in Neutral N ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into Park P Returning to Normal Operation
385. th MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks and WMA Inserting Compact Disc s CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism You may eject a disc with the radio OFF If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 SEEK Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left side of the button to return to the beginning of the current selection or retum to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first 5 seconds of the current selection SCAN Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing LOAD EJECT Button CD Mode for CD Audio Play LOAD EJECT Load Press the LOAD EJT button and the push a button with the corresponding number where LOAD the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DI
386. the lock tang from the pivot then rotate and pull away from the box Once the cables are free move to the right side of the tailgate hinge bracket Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right side pivot clears the hanger bracket Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free the left side pivot Remove the tailgate from the vehicle entirely Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck pickup box NOTE Dual rear wheel pickup models require properly spaced rear clearance lights If such a vehicle is operated without a tailgate suitable lights must be installed 80d0aad4 Tailgate Open 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEE WARNING To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide which is deadly the exhaust system on vehicles equipped with Cap or Slide In Campers should extend beyond the overhanging camper compartment and be free of leaks Tailgate Support Strap Attachment UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Bl Instruments And Controls ee 187 N Instrument Cluster aaa aaa aaa 188 Instrument Cluster 6 7L Diesel Engine 188 B Instrument Cluster Description 189 B Electronic Digital Clock cssc ER nr rx 199 Clock Setting Procedure 200 Bl Radio General Information 200 Radio Broadcast Signals 200 Two Types Of Signals 200
387. the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Audio control 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the rewind fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satel lite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency AM FM Button Radio Mode Press the button to select AM or FM Modes Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREB will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will display Tum the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak
388. the tire was manufactured 2 digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 STARTING AND OPERATING 319 Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRO THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS NEVER EXCEED XXX K NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B pillar RTA P195 70R14 T125 70D15 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION RA 4N109268 J 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 the total weight your vehicle can carry Pada 3 the tire size designed for your vehicle Tire Placard Location 4 the cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires 320 STARTING AND OPERATING M Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire an
389. timate purchaser or while it is in use or 2 the use of the vehicle after such device or element of design has been removed or rendered inoperative by any person NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445 Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are the acts listed below e AIR CLEANER Removal of the air cleaner Removal of the air cleaner filter element from the air cleaner housing Removal of the air ducting e EXHAUST SYSTEM Removal or rendering inoperative exhaust system components including the muffler or tailpipe e ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM Removal or rendering inoperative the fan clutch Removal of the fan shroud Noise Emission Warranty The manufacturer warrants that this vehicle as manufac tured by the manufacturer was designed built and equipped to conform at the time it left the manufacturer s control with all applicable U S EPA Noise Control Regu lations This warranty covers this vehicle as designed built and equipped by the manufacturer and is not limited to any particular part component or system of the vehicle manufactured by the manufacturer Defects in design assembly or in any part component or system of the vehicle as manufactured by the manufacturer which at the time it left the manufacturer s control caused noise Wf emissions to exceed Federal standards are covered by this warranty for the life of the vehicle 446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Maintenance Lo
390. tions 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEE Vehicles equipped with a 4 speed automatic transmis sion may exhibit several 4 3 downshifts under the above conditions To reduce the frequency of the downshifts and to improve vehicle performance it is advisable to lock out overdrive by pressing the O D OFF button located at the end of the gear shifter WARNING Speed Control can be dangerous where the system can t maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Don t use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery OVERHEAD CONSOLE WITH ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC DIESEL ONLY The overhead console contains dome reading lights and an Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Dome Reading Lights Located in the overhead console are two dome reading lights The dome reading lights illuminate when a door is opened or when the interior lights are turned on by rotating the dimmer control located on the Headlight Switch The reading lights are activated by pressing on the recessed area of the corresponding lens en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 NOTE The dome reading lights will remain on until Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they h
391. tment damage can occur In order to correct this condition it will be necessary to have the truck serviced by your local authorized dealer Maintenance Free Batteries The top of the maintenance free batteries are perma nently sealed You will never have to add water nor is periodic maintenance required NOTE Replacement batteries should both be of equal capacity to prevent damage to the vehicle s charging system WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Don t allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Don t use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 volts Don t allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and identified on the battery case If a fast charger is used while battery is in vehicle disconnect bot
392. to avoid excessive clutch slippage Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The D range can be selected when towing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range select TOW HAUL mode or select a lower gear using the Auto 6 ERS switch NOTE Using the TOW HAUL range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will im prove performance and extend transmission life by re ducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 363 The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation See Maintenance Schedule in section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing Towing Tips Tow Haul If Equipped To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat ing turn the TOW HAUL feature ON when driving in hilly areas or downshift the transmission using the Auto 6 ERS switch Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Don t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Towing Tips Cooling
393. to hold a lap top computer a cellular telephone CD s and miscellaneous items The top of the cover provides a generous firm surface to serve as a desktop for your mobile office WARNING e This armrest is not a seat Anyone seated on the armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle operation or an accident Only use the center seating position when the armrest is fully upright Center Storage Compartment 40 20 40 Seat If Equipped In an accident the latch may open if the total weight of the items stored exceeds about 10 Ibs 4 5 kg These items could be thrown about endanger ing occupants of the vehicle Items stored should not exceed a total of 10 Ibs 4 5 kg The center portion of the seat folds down to provide an armrest with unique storage compartments under the lid Push the button on the front of the armrest to raise the cover Inside there is a power outlet if equipped 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEE CAUTION Center Storage Compartment Bucket Seats If Equipped e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the batt
394. to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and should be avoided when pos sible Damage to the power steering pump may occur TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings SERVICE MAXIMUM DESCRIPTION LOAD MAXIMUM SIZE DESIGNATION PRESSURE TREADWEAR U S DOT TRACTION SAFETY AND STANDARDS TEMPERATURE CODE GRADES TIN 811b44e8 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample P215 65R15 95H STARTING AND OPERATING 315 European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall prec
395. traint on the seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back under the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the Regular Cab With Any Bench Seat Seat NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Multiple Child Restraint Installation Sequence Quad Cab Rear Seats 1 Obtain tether straps by raising the head restraints and reaching between the rear glass and rear seat The tether strap may be retained with an elastic band Accessibility to the tether strap is greatly improved by raising the seat cushion to the up position Remove the elastic before use 2 Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat and then to the anchor directly behind the center rear seat 3 Pass each tether strap hook under the head restraint and through the loop of webbing behind the child seat 4 Route each tether strap to the anchor behind the center seat and attach the hooks to the metal ring 5 Place a child restraint on the center rear seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat and to the anchor directly behind the right seat 6 Install each child restraint and remove the slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufactur er s instructions 72 THINGS TO KNOW
396. uence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your pin number followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the Voice Recognition button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used to navigate through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEE You can also send stored UConnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voicemail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the Voice Recognition button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The UConnect will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phone book entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations this is normal e Some paging and voicemail systems have system timeout settings too short that may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is playing Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the Voi
397. uine Parts for correct fluid type Automatic Transmission Fluid and Filter Change To obtain best performance and long life for automatic transmissions the manufacturer recommends that they be given regular maintenance service by an Authorized Dodge Dealer or Service Center It is important that the transmission fluid is maintained at the correct level and that it is drained and refilled as specified It is important that proper lubricant is used in the transmission Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the correct lubricant type A filter change should be made at the time of the oil change The fluid and filter s should be changed as specified in the Maintenance Schedule Section 8 NOTE If the transmission is disassembled for any reason the fluid and filter should be changed Special Additives The manufacturer recommends against the addition of any additives to the transmission Exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks The use of transmission sealers should be avoided since they may adversely affect seals NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443 Front Wheel Bearings Front wheel bearings for all Dodge Ram Trucks are sealed for life They do not reguire greasing or seal replacement In some instances these bearings will purge excess grease and the bearing housing will look slightly wet This is normal e Periodic inspection for excess play is recommended e If
398. uld NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag unless the airbag is turned off 2500 3500 Standard Cab Vehicles Only An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position See the Passenger Airbag On Off Switch section You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 If your vehicle does not have a rear seat see the Passenger Airbag On Off Switch section 3 Children that are not big enough to properly wear the vehicle seat belt see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm 4 All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts properly 5 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the airbag room to inflate 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE 6 If your vehicle has window bags do not lean against the door or window airbags will inflate forcefully into WARNING the space between you and the door e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more 7 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be severe injuries in a collision
399. uration loading to comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR requirements WARNING An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling stability braking per formance and could result in an accident Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information NN STARTING AND OPERATING 353 EXAMPLE ONLY EXAMPLE ONLY FIG 3 IMPROPER ADJUSTMENT INCORRECT FIG 2 WITH WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION CORRECT gigioes 8181f96f Weight Distributing Hitch System Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System 354 STARTING AND OPERATING Sx Fifth Wheel Hitch A special high platform with a coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle in the truck bed Connects a vehicle and fifth wheel trailer with a coupling king pin Gooseneck Hitch The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup truck The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted over the rear axle in the truck bed Trailer Hitch Classification The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to 2 000 Ibs 907 kg without added equipment or alterations to the standard equipment Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 Ibs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See y
400. ved or the tank filled e Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running Avoid Using Contaminated Fuel Fuel that is contaminated by water or dirt can cause severe damage to the engine fuel system Proper main tenance of the engine fuel filter and fuel tank is essential See Section 7 for Maintenance Procedures NOTE Climatized diesel fuel is a blend of Number 2 and Number 1 Diesel fuel which reduces the temperature at which wax crystals form in the fuel Bulk Fuel Storage If you store quantities of fuel good maintenance of the stored fuel is also essential Fuel contaminated with water will promote the growth of microbes These microbes form slime that will clog fuel filters and lines Drain condensation from the supply tank and change the line filter on a regular basis NOTE When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of fuel air is pulled into the fuel system 346 STARTING AND OPERATING M You may try priming as described below However if the engine will not start refer to the fuel priming procedure in the Service Manual or have the vehicle towed to an authorized Dodge dealer WARNING Do not open the high pressure fuel system with the engine running Engine operation causes high fuel pressure High pressure fuel spray can cause serious injury or death Priming if the engine has run out of fuel 1 Add a substantial guantity of fuel to the tank 5 to 10 gallons 19 to 38L 2 C
401. vehicle headlights are ON low beam An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on The fog lights will turn off when the switch is pushed a second time when the headlight switch is rotated to the OFF position or the high beam is selected Cargo Light If Equipped 814830fd Cargo Light Switch The cargo lights are turned on by pressing on the CARGO button The interior lights will also turn on when the cargo lights are on The cargo lights will also turn on for 30 seconds when a key fob Unlock is pressed as part of the illuminated entry feature en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Multifunction Control Lever The multifunction control lever is located on the left side of the steering column Turn Signals Move the lever up or down to signal a right hand or left hand turn The arrow on either side of the instrument cluster flashes to indicate the direction of the turn and proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights If a defective bulb or wiring circuit is detected for the turn signal system the arrow indicators will flash at a faster rate If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the switch or indicator lamp is defective You can signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down Turn Signal Lever Turn Signal Auto Mode Tap the multi function control lever once and the turn signal left or rig
402. ven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufac turer s instructions for cleaning e It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners if equipped cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front passenger seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right si
403. vice Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Service Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about your service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract Na tional Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s Service Contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer s Service Contract and you require service after your manufactur er s new vehicle limited warranty expires please refer to your contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased your new vehicle Your dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with your ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns es F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 493 WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and cer
404. ving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the airbag control mod ule may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your dealer if the fuse is good NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to 5 seconds of specific vehicle data parameters see the following list in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment and up to a quarter second of high speed deceleration data during and or after airbag deployment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to
405. wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and position it properly across the wheel opening For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation stow with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle Attach the wheel wrench to the extension tube Rotate the winch mechanism until the wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle Continue to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism slip or click 3 or 4 times It cannot be overtightened Push against the tire several times to be sure it is firmly in place HOISTING A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking locations refer to the graphics that show jacking loca tions However a floor jack or frame hoist must never be used on any other parts or the underbody CAUTION Never use a floor jack directly under the differential housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle may result NEE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 391 JUMP STARTING NOTE Replacement batteries should both be of equal size to prevent damage to the vehicles charging system WARNING Your vehicle is equipped with two 12 volt batteries If it becomes necessary to use a booster battery with jumper cables to start a vehicle s engine because its batteries are discharged the following procedure should be followed To prevent personal injury or damage to clothing do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or fabrics Do not lean over a battery when connecting jumper
406. wheel will lock If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel With the engine running turn the steering wheel upside down turn off the engine and remove the key Turn the steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock engages To Release The Steering Wheel Lock Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine If the key is difficult to turn move the wheel slightly to the right or left to disengage the lock NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 NOTE If you turned the wheel to the right to engage the lock you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to disengage it If you turned the wheel to the left to engage the lock turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System This system prevents the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is in the ON positions and the brake pedal is depressed SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system monitors the vehicle doors and ignition for unauthorized operation When the alarm is activated the system provides both audible and visual signals For the first 3 minutes the horn will sound and the headlights and security telltale will flash repeatedly For an additional 15 minutes only the headlights and security telltale will flash The engine will run only if a valid Sentry Key is used to start the vehicle Use of the Sentry
407. with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device ie garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button To re program a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button for 20 seconds until the EVIC display states CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with PRO GRAMMING HOMELINK Step 2 and follow all remain ing steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the EVIC message states CHANNELS CLEARED Note that all channels will be erased Indi vidual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the Learn Button on the Garage Doo
408. y Programming less 17 Sentry Key Replacement 16 Service Assistance lees 490 Service Contract oss restri eee ee eee 492 Service Information lesse 404 Service Manuals elles 495 Setting the Clock 200 204 212 225 238 settings Personal 4 53 pece perisis eR s 149 SHINE ueterem ede dts dte adeat 285 Automatic Transmission less 285 Manual Transmission lle 292 Transfer Case llle 297 Transfer Case Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral IN ce cetexe RE EE 370 372 Transfer Case Shifting out of Transfer Case Ne tral N eom Re RES ES 371 374 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 42 Shoulder Bells os aie eI ned babe tage 35 Signals TUFR 9 es ge ae oe Danae gi ee as 135 Sliding Rear Window POWer 2 9 pe EE RR onde EER 33 175 Slippery Surfaces Driving On 306 Snow Chains Tire Chains 332 SNOW PIOW aues bg oh ER RU eg ers 365 Snow TIES iaa RR eH Hed ace 334 serial MP PI 419 Spare Dire 43a hee eres ea dae e RR E ee ing 327 Speed Control Cruise Control 141 Speedometef ss ii diem aie KES ae BOERE d es 190 Otani ius daneedcraps La a Ee id Rex ce Har de 269 Automatic Transmission sss 269 Engine Block Heater 270 277 Manual Transmission 514 INDEX M Starting Procedures 269 Starting Procedures Diesel Engines 269 Steering Lin
409. y deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE e The Side Impact SRS Window Bags are designed to e The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of activate only in certain side collisions When the ORC the driver and the front passenger and position every with side impact option detects a collision requiring one for the best interaction with the front airbag Be id Bags Io nate i signal du iis A Passenger Airbag On Off Switch 2500 3500 the crash side of the vehicle A quantity of nontoxic gas Standard Cab Vehicles Only is generated to inflate the window bag The inflating et id window bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one guarter of the time it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the window bag inflates This especially applies to chil dren The window bag is only about 3 1 2 inches 9 cm thick when it is inflated NOTE At no time should any supplemental restrai
410. years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 331 WARNING CAUTION Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than Replacing original tires with tires of a different size that specified for your vehicle Some combina tions of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

manuale di istruzioni July 30,10    Istruzioni per l`uso GMM 70  Commonwealth of Virginia - Virginia Department of Motor Vehicles  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file